ML17334B031: Difference between revisions
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
||
Line 27: | Line 27: | ||
1.1 Purpose.The purpose of the Licensee Event Review LER is to examine the available documentation of operating difficulties outlined in Licensee Event Reports to identify conditions that may cause human performance problems.1.2 Scope The Scope of the review will cover the LERs from D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant Units 1 and 2 for the time period of 1975 through 1982.An industry wide survey of similar plants that were in commercial operation for the period of January 1978 through September 1983 will be conducted. | 1.1 Purpose.The purpose of the Licensee Event Review LER is to examine the available documentation of operating difficulties outlined in Licensee Event Reports to identify conditions that may cause human performance problems.1.2 Scope The Scope of the review will cover the LERs from D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant Units 1 and 2 for the time period of 1975 through 1982.An industry wide survey of similar plants that were in commercial operation for the period of January 1978 through September 1983 will be conducted. | ||
2.0 REVIEW METHODOLOGY All LERs from the D.C.Cook plant covering the time period of 1975 through 1982 will be screened to eliminate those LERs not involving Control Room functions. | |||
===2.0 REVIEW=== | |||
METHODOLOGY All LERs from the D.C.Cook plant covering the time period of 1975 through 1982 will be screened to eliminate those LERs not involving Control Room functions. | |||
The LERs from similar plants covering the period from January 1978 through September 1983 will also be screened to eliminate those not involving control room functions. | The LERs from similar plants covering the period from January 1978 through September 1983 will also be screened to eliminate those not involving control room functions. | ||
The LERs remaining from the screening process will then be examined to determine the specific problem, the probable cause and the corrective action.Each of the LERs will then be compared to the existing control room equipment and/or condition to verify the corrective action and/or fix.For those conditions that have not been corrected or that could still cause a human performance problem, the LER will be reviewed against the Control Room Human Factors Surveys to determine if the problem has been identified as a Checklist Observation Report (CLO).If no CLO exists for any human performance problem identified by an LER, a CLO shall be generated. | The LERs remaining from the screening process will then be examined to determine the specific problem, the probable cause and the corrective action.Each of the LERs will then be compared to the existing control room equipment and/or condition to verify the corrective action and/or fix.For those conditions that have not been corrected or that could still cause a human performance problem, the LER will be reviewed against the Control Room Human Factors Surveys to determine if the problem has been identified as a Checklist Observation Report (CLO).If no CLO exists for any human performance problem identified by an LER, a CLO shall be generated. | ||
Line 105: | Line 107: | ||
CRITERIA RE UIREMEHTS Open/Close PROCEDURE E-0 FR-C.1 FR-H.l STEP 11 16 23 11 Figure 4 5607Y 0 | CRITERIA RE UIREMEHTS Open/Close PROCEDURE E-0 FR-C.1 FR-H.l STEP 11 16 23 11 Figure 4 5607Y 0 | ||
SYSTEM SEQUENCE HATRIX TABLE PROCEDURE: | SYSTEM SEQUENCE HATRIX TABLE PROCEDURE: | ||
E"0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEHS STEP 1-N B C H A 5 5 C C N C I 5 C V C CEE VCD SCG E F G 5'IJ E WSN H H I 5 5 H N 5 E 5 5 N H 5 NNPRRR I SMCDH SSSSCR RR5 H P 0 555 5 G P 5-N 10 12 13 14 15 16-C 16.17 18 20 21 H3:.i T.Ta" le Figure 5 5607Y II 2.2 Phase 2-Identification of Instrumentation and Control Char acteri sti cs The second phase of the SRTA program will identify and justify the instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients. | E"0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEHS STEP 1-N B C H A 5 5 C C N C I 5 C V C CEE VCD SCG E F G 5'IJ E WSN H H I 5 5 H N 5 E 5 5 N H 5 NNPRRR I SMCDH SSSSCR RR5 H P 0 555 5 G P 5-N 10 12 13 14 15 16-C 16.17 18 20 21 H3:.i T.Ta" le Figure 5 5607Y II | ||
===2.2 Phase=== | |||
2-Identification of Instrumentation and Control Char acteri sti cs The second phase of the SRTA program will identify and justify the instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients. | |||
This phase addresses item 2 (development of a process), item 3 (identification of generic instrumentation and control characteristics and plant specific deviations) and item 4 (development and justification of instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs)of the March 29, 1984 NRC meeting.This Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Review (ICCR)phase includes the definition of a process and the development of documentation to identify instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs during emergency operations. | This phase addresses item 2 (development of a process), item 3 (identification of generic instrumentation and control characteristics and plant specific deviations) and item 4 (development and justification of instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs)of the March 29, 1984 NRC meeting.This Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Review (ICCR)phase includes the definition of a process and the development of documentation to identify instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs during emergency operations. | ||
The process and documentation will address all instrumentation and controls used in the WOG ERGs and plant specific EOPs.Basis documentation will be based on the same representative event sequences and emergency operating procedures utilized in Phase 1 of the program.Definition of ICCR Process The ICCR phase will first identify generic characteristics based on the WOG high-pressure reference plant design, followed by the identification of plant specific deviations (i.e., differences and detail)and their characteristics. | The process and documentation will address all instrumentation and controls used in the WOG ERGs and plant specific EOPs.Basis documentation will be based on the same representative event sequences and emergency operating procedures utilized in Phase 1 of the program.Definition of ICCR Process The ICCR phase will first identify generic characteristics based on the WOG high-pressure reference plant design, followed by the identification of plant specific deviations (i.e., differences and detail)and their characteristics. | ||
Line 242: | Line 247: | ||
INTRODUCTION The Control Room Human Factors Survey will be divided into fourteen separate tasks, each with a specific set of related control room design features organized into a task plan.These fourteen tasks are: 1.1 Workspace Survey 1.2 Anthropometric Survey 1.3 Emergency Equipment Survey 1.4 Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition, Survey 1.5 Illumination Survey 1.6 Ambient Noise Survey 1.7 Maintainability Survey 2.1 Communications Survey 3.1 Annunciator System Review 4.1 Controls Survey 5.1 Displays Survey-6.1 Labels and Location Aids Survey F 1 Computers System 8.1 Conventions All task plans follow the general format of, 1)Introduction (to include the objectives) 2)Review Team Selection and Responsibilities 3)Criteria (from NUREG-0700, Section 6.0)4)Procedures 5).Equipment and Facility Requirements 6)Inputs and Data Forms 7)Outputs and Results 8)Figures and Tables 9)Procedure Exceptions 10)Appendices (as required). | INTRODUCTION The Control Room Human Factors Survey will be divided into fourteen separate tasks, each with a specific set of related control room design features organized into a task plan.These fourteen tasks are: 1.1 Workspace Survey 1.2 Anthropometric Survey 1.3 Emergency Equipment Survey 1.4 Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition, Survey 1.5 Illumination Survey 1.6 Ambient Noise Survey 1.7 Maintainability Survey 2.1 Communications Survey 3.1 Annunciator System Review 4.1 Controls Survey 5.1 Displays Survey-6.1 Labels and Location Aids Survey F 1 Computers System 8.1 Conventions All task plans follow the general format of, 1)Introduction (to include the objectives) 2)Review Team Selection and Responsibilities 3)Criteria (from NUREG-0700, Section 6.0)4)Procedures 5).Equipment and Facility Requirements 6)Inputs and Data Forms 7)Outputs and Results 8)Figures and Tables 9)Procedure Exceptions 10)Appendices (as required). | ||
A copy of the Annunciator System review task plan is attached as an example.Following the Control Room Human Factors surveys the completed Survey Task Plan will be added to the Control Room Design data file. | A copy of the Annunciator System review task plan is attached as an example.Following the Control Room Human Factors surveys the completed Survey Task Plan will be added to the Control Room Design data file. | ||
TP-3.1 1 May 1983 HUMAN FACTORS TASK PLAN FOR THE AMCJNCIATOR SYSTEM REVIEW The Essex Corporation 333 North Fairfax Street Alexandria, Virginia 22314 (703)548-4500 Conditionally Approved.Pending Technical Review Committee final approval.Approved fer~Signature 1 May 1983 (DOate Walter T.Talley-Manager, Systems Analysis Branch Printed Name and Title 1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 RECORD OF REVISIONS Rev.No.Rev.Date Descri tion ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 TABLE OF CONTENTS:~~1.0 OB ELECTIVES 2.0 REVIEW TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES 3.0 CRITERIA 4.0 PROCEDURES 4.1 General Instructions 4.2 Data Collection 4D Analysis 5.0 EQUIPMENT/FACILITY REQUIREMENTS 6.0 INPUTS AND DATA FORMS 7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES 9.0 PROCEDURE EXCEPTIONS | TP-3.1 1 May 1983 HUMAN FACTORS TASK PLAN FOR THE AMCJNCIATOR SYSTEM REVIEW The Essex Corporation 333 North Fairfax Street Alexandria, Virginia 22314 (703)548-4500 Conditionally Approved.Pending Technical Review Committee final approval.Approved fer~Signature 1 May 1983 (DOate Walter T.Talley-Manager, Systems Analysis Branch Printed Name and Title 1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 RECORD OF REVISIONS Rev.No.Rev.Date Descri tion ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 TABLE OF CONTENTS:~~1.0 OB ELECTIVES 2.0 REVIEW TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES | ||
===3.0 CRITERIA=== | |||
4.0 PROCEDURES | |||
===4.1 General=== | |||
Instructions 4.2 Data Collection 4D Analysis 5.0 EQUIPMENT/FACILITY REQUIREMENTS | |||
===6.0 INPUTS=== | |||
AND DATA FORMS 7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES 9.0 PROCEDURE EXCEPTIONS | |||
~Pa e 0 A.CRITERIA B.DATA FORMS C.CRITERIA MATRIX D.TASK PLAN CRITIQUE APPENDICES A-1 B-l C-1 D-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.0 OBJECTIVES a.To assess to what degree the annunciator system conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700. | ~Pa e 0 A.CRITERIA B.DATA FORMS C.CRITERIA MATRIX D.TASK PLAN CRITIQUE APPENDICES A-1 B-l C-1 D-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.0 OBJECTIVES a.To assess to what degree the annunciator system conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700. | ||
b.To identify and document any features in the annunciator system design that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700. | b.To identify and document any features in the annunciator system design that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700. | ||
2.0 REVIEW TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES a.A human factors specialist to conduct the data collection and analysis and to prepare the task report.b.A client nuclear operations specialist to supply plant systems information concerning alarm parameters and alarm response procedures. | |||
===2.0 REVIEW=== | |||
TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES a.A human factors specialist to conduct the data collection and analysis and to prepare the task report.b.A client nuclear operations specialist to supply plant systems information concerning alarm parameters and alarm response procedures. | |||
c.A client plant INC engineer to assist in identifying relevant plant systems information. | c.A client plant INC engineer to assist in identifying relevant plant systems information. | ||
3.0 CRITERIA The criteria are from NUREG-0700, paragraphs 6.>.l.l, 6.3.1.2a through d(2), 68.1.3a through d, 6D.1.4a and b, 6D.1.5a through b(3), 6D.2.1a through f, 6.3.>.la through b(2), 6.3.2.2a and b, 6.3.3.1a through c(3), 66.3.2a through f(2), 6.3.3.3a through f, 6D.3.4a through d, 6D.3.5a through d(6), 6D.4.1a through d(2), 6.3.4.2a.through c, 6.3.4.3a and b, 6.5.1.6a through d(2), and 6.6.6.2a (see Appendix A).4.0 PROCEDURES 4.1 General Instructions | |||
===3.0 CRITERIA=== | |||
The criteria are from NUREG-0700, paragraphs 6.>.l.l, 6.3.1.2a through d(2), 68.1.3a through d, 6D.1.4a and b, 6D.1.5a through b(3), 6D.2.1a through f, 6.3.>.la through b(2), 6.3.2.2a and b, 6.3.3.1a through c(3), 66.3.2a through f(2), 6.3.3.3a through f, 6D.3.4a through d, 6D.3.5a through d(6), 6D.4.1a through d(2), 6.3.4.2a.through c, 6.3.4.3a and b, 6.5.1.6a through d(2), and 6.6.6.2a (see Appendix A).4.0 PROCEDURES | |||
===4.1 General=== | |||
Instructions | |||
====4.1.1 Preparation==== | ====4.1.1 Preparation==== | ||
Line 259: | Line 280: | ||
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 c.Use the analysis aids from Appendix B for all data reduction and analysis.Upon completion of all analyses, ensure that the criteria in Appendix A are properly annotated (as specified in the analysis aids).d.Submit the completed task plan to your immediate supervisor for review.Upon project management approval, initiate Task Report 3.1.5.0 EQUIPMENT AM3 FACILITY REQUIREMENTS a.Access to the control room.b.Sound le.el meter.c.Protractor and tape measure.d.Flash comparator. | ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 c.Use the analysis aids from Appendix B for all data reduction and analysis.Upon completion of all analyses, ensure that the criteria in Appendix A are properly annotated (as specified in the analysis aids).d.Submit the completed task plan to your immediate supervisor for review.Upon project management approval, initiate Task Report 3.1.5.0 EQUIPMENT AM3 FACILITY REQUIREMENTS a.Access to the control room.b.Sound le.el meter.c.Protractor and tape measure.d.Flash comparator. | ||
6.0 INPUTS AND DATA FORMS a.Annunciator Response Procedures b.Annunciator Administrative Procedures c.Completed Task Reports for: 1.System Function and Task Analysis 2.Conventions 3.Labels and Location Aids d0 e.4.Maintainability Criteria List (Appendix A)The following from Appendix B: 1.Measurements Data Forms 2.Questionnaire 3.Observations Checklist 4.Documentation Review Checklist 5.Analysis Aids 6.HED Report Forms Criteria Matrix (Appendix C)Task Plan Critique Form (Appendix D)7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS a.Completed HEDs b.Completed Task Report. | |||
===6.0 INPUTS=== | |||
AND DATA FORMS a.Annunciator Response Procedures b.Annunciator Administrative Procedures c.Completed Task Reports for: 1.System Function and Task Analysis 2.Conventions 3.Labels and Location Aids d0 e.4.Maintainability Criteria List (Appendix A)The following from Appendix B: 1.Measurements Data Forms 2.Questionnaire 3.Observations Checklist 4.Documentation Review Checklist 5.Analysis Aids 6.HED Report Forms Criteria Matrix (Appendix C)Task Plan Critique Form (Appendix D)7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS a.Completed HEDs b.Completed Task Report. | |||
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES None. | ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES None. | ||
Line 457: | Line 480: | ||
For criterion 6.3.2.la in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED report number and the'code number, TP3.185.2.1 in the COMMENTS column.85.2-2 | For criterion 6.3.2.la in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED report number and the'code number, TP3.185.2.1 in the COMMENTS column.85.2-2 | ||
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 85.3 MEASUREMENT ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 3.LIGHT MEASUREMENTS (TILE FLASH CHARACTERISTICS) 3.1 Alarmed Flash Characteristics | ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 85.3 MEASUREMENT ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 3.LIGHT MEASUREMENTS (TILE FLASH CHARACTERISTICS) | ||
===3.1 Alarmed=== | |||
Flash Characteristics | |||
-6.3.3.2b.a.From the recorded data, determine if the alarmed flash rate is between 3 to 5 flashes per second and that the on-off ratio is approximately 1:l.b.If both parameters meet the criteria, check the YES column for criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A.c~If either parameter fails to meet the criteria, record the discrepancy on an HED report form.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.3.1 in the data collection description. | -6.3.3.2b.a.From the recorded data, determine if the alarmed flash rate is between 3 to 5 flashes per second and that the on-off ratio is approximately 1:l.b.If both parameters meet the criteria, check the YES column for criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A.c~If either parameter fails to meet the criteria, record the discrepancy on an HED report form.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.3.1 in the data collection description. | ||
For criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A check the NO column and record the HED number and the code number,, TP-3.1B5.3.1, in the COMMENTS column.3.2 Cleared Flash Rate-6.3.1.5b(1). | For criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A check the NO column and record the HED number and the code number,, TP-3.1B5.3.1, in the COMMENTS column.3.2 Cleared Flash Rate-6.3.1.5b(1). | ||
Line 490: | Line 516: | ||
==1.0 INTRODUCTION== | ==1.0 INTRODUCTION== | ||
1.1 Purpose The purpose of Verification of Task Performance Capabilities is to assure that operator tasks can be performed within the existing'ontrol room with minimum potential for human error.Verification evaluates,the availability and suitability of the control room instrumentation and controls to support the performance of operator actions.1.2 Scope The sc'ope of the Verification Task effort is to assure the availability and suitability of those controls and instrumentation identified in the element tables for the emergency operating procedures selected for task analysis.The remaining main control board devices will then be compared against NUREG-0700, Section 6 Guidelines that pertain to verification of task performance capabilities. | ===1.1 Purpose=== | ||
The purpose of Verification of Task Performance Capabilities is to assure that operator tasks can be performed within the existing'ontrol room with minimum potential for human error.Verification evaluates,the availability and suitability of the control room instrumentation and controls to support the performance of operator actions.1.2 Scope The sc'ope of the Verification Task effort is to assure the availability and suitability of those controls and instrumentation identified in the element tables for the emergency operating procedures selected for task analysis.The remaining main control board devices will then be compared against NUREG-0700, Section 6 Guidelines that pertain to verification of task performance capabilities. | |||
==2.0 VERIFICATION== | ==2.0 VERIFICATION== | ||
Line 509: | Line 536: | ||
==1.0 INTRODUCTION== | ==1.0 INTRODUCTION== | ||
1.1 Purpose The purpose of this program is to define the process to be used for validation of control room functions. | ===1.1 Purpose=== | ||
The purpose of this program is to define the process to be used for validation of control room functions. | |||
This document describes the preparation> | This document describes the preparation> | ||
implementation and documentation phases of the validation program and assigns responsibilities for execution of the validation program.1.2 Scope Val idation is the process of determining whether the control room operating crew can perform their tasks effectively given the control room design (instrumentation and controls)i the procedures and their training.These four considerations (oper atorsi control room>procedures and training)are frequently referred to as the components of the Emergency Response Capability systems and the validation performed to evaluate their overall performance is termed a SYSTEM validation. | implementation and documentation phases of the validation program and assigns responsibilities for execution of the validation program.1.2 Scope Val idation is the process of determining whether the control room operating crew can perform their tasks effectively given the control room design (instrumentation and controls)i the procedures and their training.These four considerations (oper atorsi control room>procedures and training)are frequently referred to as the components of the Emergency Response Capability systems and the validation performed to evaluate their overall performance is termed a SYSTEM validation. | ||
Line 534: | Line 562: | ||
===3.4 Validation=== | ===3.4 Validation=== | ||
Data Collection Data collection will originate from the following sources: l.Video and audio recordings of each scenario.2.Observation team inputs during talk-through sessions.3.Operating team inputs o During walk-throughs o During talk-throughs Problems identified during the talk-through sessions will be recorded on a'talk-through problem report form shown on Attachment 2.Validation data will be collected for later review by the observation team to identify Checklist Observation Reports.6 3.5 Operating Crew Responsib il 1 t1es The operat1ng crew is responsible for performing the walk-through in accordance with the scenarios and procedures identified and to respond to questions posed by the observation team during the talk-throughs. | Data Collection Data collection will originate from the following sources: l.Video and audio recordings of each scenario.2.Observation team inputs during talk-through sessions.3.Operating team inputs o During walk-throughs o During talk-throughs Problems identified during the talk-through sessions will be recorded on a'talk-through problem report form shown on Attachment 2.Validation data will be collected for later review by the observation team to identify Checklist Observation Reports.6 | ||
===3.5 Operating=== | |||
Crew Responsib il 1 t1es The operat1ng crew is responsible for performing the walk-through in accordance with the scenarios and procedures identified and to respond to questions posed by the observation team during the talk-throughs. | |||
The operating crew is also responsible for identifying known Control Room defic1ency not identified during the walk-through session.3.6 Observat1on Team Responsibilities The Observation team is responsible for noting any deviations (real~suspectedi negative or positive)from the expected performance observed during the walk-throughs~ | The operating crew is also responsible for identifying known Control Room defic1ency not identified during the walk-through session.3.6 Observat1on Team Responsibilities The Observation team is responsible for noting any deviations (real~suspectedi negative or positive)from the expected performance observed during the walk-throughs~ | ||
and to discuss such deviation with the operators during the talk-throughs to identify Control Room problems.It is also the responsibility of the Observation team to complete the talk-through problem report sheets for each of the identified problems. | and to discuss such deviation with the operators during the talk-throughs to identify Control Room problems.It is also the responsibility of the Observation team to complete the talk-through problem report sheets for each of the identified problems. |
Revision as of 12:35, 18 October 2018
ML17334B031 | |
Person / Time | |
---|---|
Site: | Cook ![]() |
Issue date: | 12/30/1986 |
From: | AMERICAN ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE CORP., ESSEX CORP., WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC COMPANY, DIV OF CBS CORP. |
To: | |
Shared Package | |
ML17334B029 | List: |
References | |
NUDOCS 8701070384 | |
Download: ML17334B031 (813) | |
Text
VOI;UME"3<:..TABLE Of.'.CONTENTS-';
A.Detailed Instructions.for-Revi.ew, Phase Tasks.B.NRC Staff Comments.:.os-.Program Pl.an, C.Summary of May 8,, 1984,'.tieeting.'wi:t).,NRf;-
Stjff D.Letter AEP:NRC:07739, E.Control Room OperatinyPersonnel" Survey,.I'nterview guesti,gas
.F.Summary Sheets for-.Gontrol Rgom pperat1ng-"Personnel:Interviews G.Letter AEP:NRC:0773I and<NRC'esponse H.Human Engineeri'ng'Discrepancy.
Assessmeqg, Methodology and>Criteria~~r Control Room Operator'-
gpestionyaipe For" Col.umbu's-Mockup';Control Room improvements, Phoi;..os,, Samples-'.anI Drawings Personnel Resumes 8701070384 861230 PDR ADOCK 08000316 PDR tl lf&I'I r'k 0 APPENDIX A DONALD C.COOK, NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS'OR RFVIEW PHASE TASKS D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW PROGRAM PLAN FOR THE LICENSEE EVENT REPORTS REVIEW
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose.The purpose of the Licensee Event Review LER is to examine the available documentation of operating difficulties outlined in Licensee Event Reports to identify conditions that may cause human performance problems.1.2 Scope The Scope of the review will cover the LERs from D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant Units 1 and 2 for the time period of 1975 through 1982.An industry wide survey of similar plants that were in commercial operation for the period of January 1978 through September 1983 will be conducted.
2.0 REVIEW
METHODOLOGY All LERs from the D.C.Cook plant covering the time period of 1975 through 1982 will be screened to eliminate those LERs not involving Control Room functions.
The LERs from similar plants covering the period from January 1978 through September 1983 will also be screened to eliminate those not involving control room functions.
The LERs remaining from the screening process will then be examined to determine the specific problem, the probable cause and the corrective action.Each of the LERs will then be compared to the existing control room equipment and/or condition to verify the corrective action and/or fix.For those conditions that have not been corrected or that could still cause a human performance problem, the LER will be reviewed against the Control Room Human Factors Surveys to determine if the problem has been identified as a Checklist Observation Report (CLO).If no CLO exists for any human performance problem identified by an LER, a CLO shall be generated.
3.0 DOCUMENTATION
PHASE Documentation generated and LERs reviewed during the LER review will be collected and maintained as a part of the DCRDR'ocumentation file.This documentation will consist of the following:
1.Lists of LERs to be reviewed as a result of the screening process 2.Copies of the LERs reviewed 3.LER Summary Report 0.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW CONTROL ROOM OPERATING PERSONNEL SURVEY PROCEDURE CONDUCT OF THE D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM OPERATING PERSONNEL SURVEY The survey of D.C.Cook personnel is a part of Phase 2, Task l.of the DCRDR.This survey will include both Units 1 and 2.Our general approach to conducting the survey will be to interview those individuals who have sufficient experience in the D.C.Cook control rooms to provide knowledgeable and useful insights into the design features of the control room and its equipment.
Most of this survey will be conducted with interviews of control room personnel.
It may be useful to provide questionnaires to some of the RO/SRO staff who have heavy time constraints.
Specific information regarding the selection of these individuals is given below followed by suggestions for implementing the survey.Based on information presently available, there are 83 operating shift personnel who have an appropriate level of control room experience for the survey.At least half of these individuals, representing a range of experience and responsibilities,'should be represented in the survey.NUREG-0700 describes two basic classifications to use when selecting staff for the survey.One classification is based on current position description and the other is based on type of previous experience.
The table below presents the range of job descriptions to be sampled in this survey.Also shown is the recommended number of individuals which should be surveyed from each category.These job descriptions represent a wide range of operational responsibilities and familiarity with the D.C.Cook control rooms.The actual number of individuals selected for each category can vary somewhat to allow for several variables (e.g., plant conditions, vacations, and shift schedules) insofar as each job category is still represented and the total minimum number of individuals is still present.Table 1 Sample Selection by Position Description Operations Managers/Staf f Shif t Supervisors Shift Technical Advisors Senior Reactor Operators Reactor Operators Trainees Auxiliary Operators 8 10 2 5 7 6 6
The second classification for staff selection is amount and type of previous control room experience.
At least one person from each experience category shown below should be in the survey in order to provide different perspectives of the control room.It is possible, of course, that not all of these categories are represented at D.C.Cook.Table 2 Amount and Type of Previous Experience 1.More than two years at D.C.Cook.2.Between six months and two years at D.C.Cook.3.Less than six months at D.C.Cook but has licensed experience at.other commercial nuclear power plants.0.Less than six months at D.C.Cook but has been reactor operator in nuclear navy.5.Less than six months at D.C.Cook but has been licensed operator in non-nuclear control room.6.Less than six months at D.C.Cook and has no previous experience in control room.Most of the personnel will be interviewed individually and in small groups of two or three persons.Whereas the individual interviews allow privacy between interviewer and" interviewee, the small group interview provides an opportunity for an interaction between operators which could result in useful information for the survey which may not appear in individual interviews.
Persons selected for group interviews should be given the option of participating in an individual interview instead of a group interview.
The members of a group should all be within the same job classification (e.g., Reactor Operator).
Question-naires can be given to those operations managers/staff, and possibly STAs and supervisors who have heavy time constraints.
We recommend that the numbers shown in the following table be used as a guideline for selecting participants.
for the survey.
Table 3 Distribution of Survey Types Survey Type Number of Individuals Individual Interviews Group Interviews For example: 6 groups of 3 or 9 groups of 2 or a combination of these Questionnaires 20 18 The average length of the interview is about two hours.This should allow the interviewers to complete three interviews per day while allowing for shift change and breaks.Except for unanticipated events, operators should be able to give undivided attention to the interview.
We prefer that both the 8-0 shift and the 0-12 shift be available for interviews.
This should allow a sampling of at least four of the five shifts during a two-week period.The maximum number of interviewers will be two.The following schedule is prooosed for the interviewers.
On the first day at D.C.Cook both interviewers will receive control room orientation and badging procedures.
The interviews for the remainder of the week will be conducted by the two interviewers during the 8-0 shift in order to allow the interviewers access to both the operations shift and the training shift.During the second week, one interviewer will be present during the 0-12 shift.This should allow access to two additional shifts or groups of operators because of the changeover of shifts at approxi-mately mid-week in the 0-12 time slot.It is possible that these interviews and the meetings described below will require a portion of a third week.Questionnaires will be available on the first day of interviews.
They should be returned preferably within a week to allow for possible follow-up interviews, if necessary, before the analysis of the data.
After the interviews, the results will be tabulated and examined.Two days should be allowed for this activity.Then two meetings should be scheduled for the next day with available operating personnel to discuss significant survey results.One meeting should be attended by AEOs, trainees, and new ROs.The other meeting should be attended by more experienced personnel.
Figure l indicates a proposed schedule for the two interviewers.
The Technical Support Center is a possible location for conducting the interviews due to its privacy and visual access to both control rooms through remotely controlled cameras.
Intervi ewer 8 0 3 3 3 3'4 tO 0 w W l5 N Cl Ol Cl 3 3 X 0 U Number of Interviews 18 No.1 M T W T F M T W T F Interviewer No.2 2 3 3 3 M T W T F 11 29:~8-4 S?jift 4-12 Shift 0:0 Figure 1.Schematic interview schedule showing estimated number of interviews conducted by.each interviewer
D.C.COOK SYSTEH REVIEW AND TASK ANALYSIS PROGRAH DESCRIPTION July 25, 1985 5607Y 0 0 0~.
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
1.2 Objectives
2 TASK ANALYSIS PROGRAM 2.1 Identification of Operator Actions and Required Instrumentation and Controls 2.2'dentification of Instrumentation and Controls Characteristics 15 3
SUMMARY
OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION 31 4 USE OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION IN VERIFICATION 33 5 USE OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION IN VALIDATION 6 REFERENCES 37 APPENDIX A-NRC CLARIFICATION OF TASK ANALYSIS REQUIRFMENTS 38 TABLE 1 SELECTED EVENT SEQUENCES FOR TASK ANALYSIS 2 SELECTED EOPs FOR TASK ANALYSIS 5607Y 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS FIGURE PAGE l.EOP USAGE FOR SHALL BREAK LOCA 2.EXAHPLE ELEHENT TABLE 3.EXAHPLE INSTRUHENTATION REQUIREMENTS TABLE 4..EXAMPLE CONTROLI INDICATION REQUIREHENTS TABLE 5.EXAMPLE SYSTEH SEQUENCE HATRIX 6.EXAMPLE CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE (INSTRUMENTATION) 7." EXAHPLE CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE (CONTROL/INDICATION) 8.EXAMPLE CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE (INSTRUHENTATION) 9.EXAHPLE CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE (CONTROL/INDICATION) 10.EXAMPLE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON TABLE (INSTRUMENTATION) 11.EXAMPLE CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON TABLE (CONTROL/INDICATION) 12.EXAMPLE INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS TABLE 13.EXAMPLE CONTROL/INDICATION REQUIREMENTS TABLE 12 13 14 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 5607Y
l.INTRODUCTION The System Review and Task Analysis (SRTA)program systematically evaluates and identifies the needs of the control room operations crew to permit acceptable performance of operator functions in response to emergency transients.
The SRTA process and documentation are based on the methodology (see Reference 1)developed by the Westinghouse Owners Group (WOG)and the NRC clarification coments (see Reference 2)on task analysis provided to the WOG a'.the March 29, 1984 meeting.The SRTA documentation provides the information required by the control room design review (CRDR)team to perform the Verification of Operator Task Performance Capability review phase of the CRDR and evaluates the operator information and control needs as a basis for the identification of instrumentation and control characteristics.
1.1~Back round The SRTA program was initiated in early 1984 concurrent with the EOP Upgrade Program for D.C.Cook.The initial SRTA program was based on the task analysis methodology developed by the WOG.Following the March 29, 1984 meeting with the NRC (see Attachment A), the SRTA program was augmented to include an activity to define operator information and control needs and instrumentation and control characteristics.
This additional activity has been coordinated with the initial task analysis activity to provide a comprehensive SRTA program consisting of two phases as defined in this, program plan.1.2~0b ectivea 5607Y The first objective of the SRTA program is to provide task analysis requirements for emergency operations based on the D.C.Cook Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs)and to compile and organize these requirements in a manner that supports the CRDR.The task analysis documentation provides the CRDR team with documentation that systematically identifies operator task requirements and associated instrumentation and control requirements.
This objective addresses the recommendations in Section 3.4 of NUREG-0700, Guidelines for Control Room Design Review.
The second objective of the SRTA program is to define the instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients.
This objective addresses item 2 (development of a process), item 3 (identification of generic instrumentation and control characteristics and plant specific deviations) and item 4 (development and justification of instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs)of the March 29, 1984 NRC meeting.The documentation developed as a result of the SRTA program will satisfy the needs of the CRDR program and the requirements of the NRC.5607Y
2.TASK ANALYSIS PROGRAH The SRTA program consists of two phases: 1)Identification of operator actions that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients, including requirements for instrumentation and controls, and 2)Identification of instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients.
As discussed in the Introduction, the two SRTA program pha-es were developed with Phase 2 being added to the program following the Harch 29, 1984 NRC meeting.Phase 1 documentation is based on the plant specific EOPs for D.C.Cook.Phase 2 documentation is based on both generic documentation (WOG Emergency Response Guidelines (ERGs)and background documents) and the plant specific EOPs for D.C.Cook, consistent with the NRC clarification provided at the subject NRC meeting.Use of both the generic ERGs and the plant specific EOPs in Phase 2 facilitates identification of generic requirements and plant specific differences, in compliance with Item 2 of the NRC clarification comments provided at the Harch 29, 1984 meeting.2.1 Phase 1-Identification of 0 erator Actions and Re uired Instrumentation and Controls The first phase of the SRTA program consists of a systematic evaluation of representative plant emergency operations to identify operator actions and associated instrumentation and controls necessary to support operator response to emergency transients.
The methodology and documentation for this phase are based on that developed by the WOG (see Reference 1).The following subsections describe the selection of event sequences and EOPs for task analysis and the process to be used to analyze the EOPs to identify and document operator actions and required instrumentation and controls.5607Y Selection of Event Se uences and EOPs for Task Anal sis Task analysis data will be developed for event sequences that reflect a spectrum of plant emergency operations.
The event sequences selected comply with the recommendations in NUREG-0700 (see Reference 3), and ensure that the task analysis documentation addresses the important areas of emergency operations (e.g., event'diagnosis, critical safety function monitoring, high risk event sequences, etc.).In addition, the event sequences selected will representatively exercise the EOPs.The event sequences selected for task analysis are itemized in Table l.Based on the selected event sequences, the EOP set is reviewed to determine which procedures are used in response to the above event sequences.
In the symptomed based EOP set, at least two EOPs (or portions thereof)and the critical safety function status trees are implemented in response to an emergency transient.
Figure 1 schematically illustrates EOP implementation in response to a small break loss of coolant accident.The review of EOP implementation for the selected event sequences identifies the selected EOPs to be task analyzed.The selected EOPs to be task analyzed are'itemized in Table 2.This table also shows the event sequences for which the EOP is implemented.
Note that the Critical Safety Function Status Trees are implemented for all event sequences.
Through task analyzing these status trees, documentation will be developed for monitoring the plant safety state during emergency operations, independent of the emergency transient.
5607Y TABLE 1 SELECTED EVENT SE UENCES FOR TASK ANALYSIS 2.*3 4.5.6.7.*B 9"10.*11.12.13.14.Spuri ous Sa f ety Inj ecti on Loss of reactor coolant (small break-1 inch diameter)Loss of reactor coolant (small break-4 inch diameter)Loss of reactor coolant (large break)Loss of secondary coolant Combined loss of reactor and secondary coolant Steam generator tube rupture (design basis)Steam generator tube rupture (multiple ruptures in one steam generator)
Steam generator tube rupture (ruptures in more than one steam generator)
Anticipated transient without scram Inadequate core cooling (resulting from failures in emergency core cooling system)Inadequate core cooling (resulting from loss of secondary heat sink)Pressurized thermal shock transient High containment pressure transient*Event sequences recommended in NUREG-0700 5607Y
E0P'UshGc ron Loss or vwcTon cooLNm (snnt.L Dot:nv)ES-00 E-2 E-3 ES 0.1 ES-0.2 ES-1.1 ES-1.2 ES-3.1 ES-3.2 ES-3.3 ES.0.3 E8-0.4 ES-1.3 FS t.l EW So(los Folrlnut E-1 Sortcs Fnlrlout E-3 SIllob Foldout ECA-0.0 ECA-1.1 ECA-2.1 ECA.3.1 ECA-3.2 ECA-3.3 ECA-0.1 ECA-0.2 ECA-~1.2 l:CA-2.1 ECA-3.1 CA-3 2.CA-3.3 Fohtout Foldout Foldout I otrtout TABLE 2 SELECTED EOPs FOR TASK ANALYSIS EOPs S~euences Reactor Trip or Safety Injection SI Termination Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant Post-LOCA Cooldown and Depressurization Transfer to Cold Leg Recirculation Transfer to Hot Leg Recirculation Faulted Steam Generator Isolation Steam Generator Tube Rupture Post-SGTR Cooldown Osing Steam Dump Critical Safety Function Status Trees Response to Nuclear Power Generation/ATWS Response to Inadequate Core Cooling Response to Loss of Secondary Heat Sink Response to Imminent Pressurized Thermal Shock Conditions Response to High Containment Pressure Al 1 1,2,5,12 2,3,4,5,6 5,6 7,8,9 7;8,9 All 10 ll 12 13 14 5607Y Process for Identification of 0 erator Actions Having selected the subset of EOPs to be used, the task analysis process can be applied to each EOP to identify the operator actions necessary to implement the EOP in response to emergency transients.
Following identification of operator actions, the necessary instrumentation and control requirements to support the operator actions can be identified.
This detailed information (in addition to general information on the operator function and the purpose of each EOP step)is documented on Element Tables (see Figure 2)which are similar in format to that developed in the MOG SRTA program.The documents used for task analysis are the plant specific EOPs and the plant specific design and operational source documentation (flow diagrams, system descriptions, electrical diagrams, etc.)needed to analyze the system operational aspects of the EOPs.The WOG ERGs and Background Documents are also used as a generic source document for task analysis.The task analysis activity is a table top evaluation of the plant specific EOPs relative to the plant specific and generic source documentation to identify the operator actions and associated instrumentation and control requirements necessary to support operator response to emergency transients.
The table top evaluation is performed based on the existing plant design but is independent of the existing control room configuration and specific instruments and controls contained therein.The task analysis process is as follows: 1)Each EOP step will be evaluated to identify the operator function(s) that the step supports and the purpose for the step.This information will be entered at the top of the table.5607 Y
ELEHENT TABLE FOR E-0 STEP I FUN"TION: Verify automatic actuations Diagnose plant condition STEP: Verify Reactor Trip PURPOSE: To ensure that the reactor has tr3pped ACTIONS: o Determine if the reactor has tripped: Rods are at bottom Reactor trip and bypass breakers open Rod position indication at zero Neutron flux decreasing o Trip the reactor INSTRUMENTATION:
o Control rod bottom lights indication (rods at bottom).o Po~er range neutron flux indication (decreasing) o Intermediate range neutron flux indication (decreasing) o Source range neutron flux indication (decreasing) o Control rod position indication (at zero)o Reactor trip and bypass breaker position indications (open)CONTROL/EQUI PHENT: Reactor trip switches (trip)Figure 2 5607Y 2)The step will then be systematically reviewed to identify the operator actions necessary to implement each EOP step.Since the EOPs frequently utilize concise task statements to trigger operator actions, all actions that are needed for operation of plant systems are not explicitly identified in the FOPs.Where appropriate, the task analysis will include identification of the specific actions necessary to perform the tasks identified in the EOPs.The operator actions will be entered on the Element Table.3)Each operator action will then be evaluated to identify the instrumentation and controls necessary for the operator to perform the necessary actions.This evaluation of instrumentation and controls will also identify the instrumentation and control criteria requirements necessary for proper performance of operator actions.The instrumentation and controls will be entered on the Element Table.Criteria requirements (e.g.decreasing, at zero, etc.)will be shown in parenthesis following the associated instrumentation and controls.With respect to the task analysis process, any cautions and notes that precede EOP steps will be considered as part of the step and will be analyzed on separate Element Tables.Following preparation of the Element Tables for the selected EOPs, the remaining EOPs will be reviewed to identify any operator actions, instrumentation or controls that exist in the remaining EOPs but not the selected EOPs.This review will ensure that the selected EOPs are representative of emergency operations.
Any unique actions, instrumentation or controls identified in this review will be included in the task analysis process and identified on Element Tables.This approach provides representative task analysis documentation in an t efficient manner while ensuring complete identification of operator actions, instrumentation and controls utilized in emergency operations.
5607Y 0
Com ilation of Instrumentation and Control Re uirements Following completion of the task analysis process, the resulting information can be compiled on summary tables which highlight specific information.
This is especially advantageous for instrumentation and controls since all uses for a specific instrument or control can be presented on a single Requirements Table, precluding the need for a user to review all Element Tables to obtain the same data.Consequently, following completion of the Element Tables for the selected EOPs and unique emergency operator actions, the instrumentation and control requirements will be compiled on Instrumentation Requirements Tables (see Figure 3)and Control/Indication Requirements Tables (see Figure 4), respectively, similar in format to those developed in the WOG SRTA program.Com i lation of S stem Se uence Re uirements As part of the task analysis process to identify and evaluate operator actions, plant systems are reviewed to identify equipment (instrumentation and controls)that must be used to accomplish operator actions.Following completion of the task analysis process, the resulting information on operator actions and plant systems can be compiled to show the sequence in which the operator uses the plant systems in implementing the EOPs.A System Sequence Matrix will be prepared for each selected EOP to show the plant systems that are used to perform each step in the EOP.As with other task analysis documentation, the System Sequence Hatrices (see Figure 5)will be similar in format to that developed in the WOG SRTA program.5607Y IHSTRUMEHTATIOH REQUIREMENTS TABLE SYSTEM: Reactor Coolant INSTRUMEHTPTIOH:
RCS Pressure (HPS-121,122)
CRITERIA RE UIREMEHTS PROCEOURE STEP 1.Less than 1630 psig 2.Less than 300 psig 3.Less than 1250 psig 4.Stable or increasing 5.Greater than 300 psig~~E-0 E-0 E-1'E=.3 E-0 E-1 ES-1.1 ES-1.2 E-3 E-0 E-1 ES-1.2 E-3 10 10 35C 21 1 1 25 35 6 9 5 9 5 2 35 9 14 5 12C 12 Figure 3 5607Y CONTROL/IHOI CAT IOH REQUIREMENTS TABLE SYSTEM: Emergency Core Cooling CONTROL/INDICATION:
SI Pump Discharge Valves Control and Status (I CM-260,:265)
CRITERIA RE UIREMEHTS Open/Close PROCEDURE E-0 FR-C.1 FR-H.l STEP 11 16 23 11 Figure 4 5607Y 0
SYSTEM SEQUENCE HATRIX TABLE PROCEDURE:
E"0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEHS STEP 1-N B C H A 5 5 C C N C I 5 C V C CEE VCD SCG E F G 5'IJ E WSN H H I 5 5 H N 5 E 5 5 N H 5 NNPRRR I SMCDH SSSSCR RR5 H P 0 555 5 G P 5-N 10 12 13 14 15 16-C 16.17 18 20 21 H3:.i T.Ta" le Figure 5 5607Y II
2.2 Phase
2-Identification of Instrumentation and Control Char acteri sti cs The second phase of the SRTA program will identify and justify the instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients.
This phase addresses item 2 (development of a process), item 3 (identification of generic instrumentation and control characteristics and plant specific deviations) and item 4 (development and justification of instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs)of the March 29, 1984 NRC meeting.This Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Review (ICCR)phase includes the definition of a process and the development of documentation to identify instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs during emergency operations.
The process and documentation will address all instrumentation and controls used in the WOG ERGs and plant specific EOPs.Basis documentation will be based on the same representative event sequences and emergency operating procedures utilized in Phase 1 of the program.Definition of ICCR Process The ICCR phase will first identify generic characteristics based on the WOG high-pressure reference plant design, followed by the identification of plant specific deviations (i.e., differences and detail)and their characteristics.
Characteristics will be justified through development of or reference to appropriate generic or plant specific basis documentation.
The ICCR process to be used is as follows: 1)The set of operator functions for response to emergency transients will defined.5607Y 2)The generic ERGs will then be reviewed and guideline steps will be associated with operator functions.
3)For each operator function, the generic ERG background documentation (Step Description Tables)will be reviewed to identify: o major operator actions necessary to support the operator functions.
o operator information and control needs necessary to support the operator functions and major actions.o plant systems necessary to provide information and control needs.o plant instrumentation and controls necessary to provide information and control needs.4)For plant instrumentation and controls identified in item 3)above, generic characteristics will be identified based on the required information and control needs a)Characteristics for instrumentation will include: o Units-the identification of a parameter in terms of specific quantities for which timely and accurate information can be viewed (examples:
psig;g;'F;etc.).o Range-the interval over which a parameter may vary during the task performance based on analysis or engineering judgement (examples:
0 to 3000 psig;250-500'F, 0-100K;etc.).5607Y o Resolution-the quality of a display required to make an adequate determination of a parameter's value or performance for task cueing, or timely and accurate feedback information during a task (examples:
greater than 1837 psig;less than 144;greater than 1200'F, etc.)o Accuracy-a quantitative minimum for an information loop's performance to ensure entry into a task is appropriately cued, or the task performance is maintained within any specific limits (analytical or engineering).(Examples:
plus or minus 31 psi;plus or minus 2'F;etc'~)o Response Time-the quantitative maximum for which feedback information on a task's performance and subsequent cueing is required based on analysis or engineering judgement.(Example: 10 scca~).o Oisplay type-the type of visual information required to support task performance, classified as one or more of the following:
a)b)c)discrete or instantaneous (single value)continuous (multiple values within a range)trending (changing values within a range over a time period)5607Y
b)Characteristics for indications and controls will include: o Positions-the identification of the status of a control or indication required for making an adequate determination for verification of or performance of a specific task (examples:
open;closed;throttled; on;off;etc.).o Response time-a quantitative maximum for which the feed back performance is adequate to prevent excessive rates of change during the task performance (example: stroke time of 10 sec.).o Type-the type of control required to support task performance, classified as one or both of the following:
a)continuous (variable control)b)discrete (individual position(s) control)5)From the information gathered in items 3)and 4)above, a Characteristics Justification Table will be developed for instrumentation and,controls.
This table will identify operator action categories and associated operator information needs, criteria (e.g., specific values for instrumentation) and characteristics (e.g., range, resolution, accuracy, etc.for instrumentation).
The basis for each action category or information need will be described or a reference to other documentation will be'iven.5607Y The Characteristics Justification Tables are formatted to present both generic and plant specific characteristics, facilitating their development and the comparison of generic to plant specific characteristics.
Figure 6 (instrumentation) and Figure 7 (controls/indications) show examples of the subject tables.These figures show example information for the action categories and associated generic characteristics.
These example tables appear as they will upon completion of ICCR process it.m 5).6)Following identification of the generic characteristics in item 5), the plant specific characteristics will be identified.
The plant specific characteristics will consist of applicable generic characteristics and plant specific deviations (i.e., characteristics that differ from generic due to design differences and characteristics for plant specific design features beyond the scope of the generic design).5607Y CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE INSIRU'AENTAT ION: RCS Pressure ERG REOUIRFNENTS CHARACTERISTICS ACT ION CATEGORY/I/FORMAT ION NEEDS l.RCP Trip RCS Pressure In SG U-tubes less than RCS saturation pressure.IRCI'r Ip/Restart Gnnnrlc Issur Background Document, Sect Ion 2.3.I.1.)CRITERIA VALUE RANl E ACC RESOL UNITS RF.SP TYPE 2.S I'I era>I na t Ion a.Flow Into RCS exceeds flow out of RCS (SI Termlnatlon/
Re in 1 t I at Ion Backgroi>nd Document.Sect I on 2.I)b.SI pump flow ls zero: RCS pressure greater than Sl pump shutoff head (Sl T or m I na t I on/Re inl t I a t I on Background Document, Section 2.1)c.RHR pump flow Is zero: RCS pressure greater than RHR pump shutoff head.(E-1 Background Document, Section 4.0.SDT for Step 9)G I.ess than G Stab or Incr G Greater than G Gr enter than PI Va l>>e NA NA NA NA PS IG PSIG PSIG PSIG NA NA Character I s t I cs Tab I e
0 CHARACTERISTICS JUSTIFICATION TABLE CONTROLS/IN)ICATION:
SI Pump Olscharge Valves ERG REOUIREH'ENTS ACTION CATEQORT/INf'ORNATION NEEOS 1.Ver 1 fy equiprsant status: Valves tlldt are required to be open to provide SI flov to tha RCS are open.(E-0 BackOround Oocuaant.Section 4.SOT for Step 11)open CRITERIA open POSITIONS CHARACTERISTICS RESP.TINE NA T'f PE Olscreta CONTENTS Char aeter let les Tab'la
To identify plant specific characteristics, the selected subset of plant specific EOPs will be reviewed to identify deviations from the generic ERGs.These deviations will be evaluated with respect to ICCR process items 3)and 4)above.Characteristics for deviations will be identified consistent with ICCR process item 5)above.These plant specific characteristics (consisting of identified deviati'ons and applicable generic characteristics) will then be entered on the Characteristics Justification Tables.Figure 8 (instrumentation) and Figure 9 (controls/indications) show examples of the subject tables with plant specific characteristics.
included.These example tables are identical to Figures 6 and 7, respectively, except that they include plant specific characteristics, appearing as they will upon completion of ICCR process item 6).The tables facilitate comparison of generic (identified by the letter G)and plant specific (identified by the letter P)characteristics for each operator action category/information need entry.7)Generic and plant specific characteristics will be summarized on Characteristics Comparison Summary Tables for instrumentation (see Figure 10 for example)and controls/indications (see Figure 11 for example).These tables will summarize the limiting requirements for each characteristic.
8)The limiting plant specific characteristics identified in item 7)will then be added to the Instrumentation Requirements Tables (see Figure 12 for example)and Control/Indication Requirements Tables (see Figure 13 for example).This wi 11 consolidate all criteria and characteristics on a single Requirements Table for each instrument and control.5607Y
CIIARACTEAISTICS JUST II ICAT ION TABLE INSTAUMENTAT ION: RCS Pressure ERG REOUIRFMFNTS CIIARACTERIST ICS ACTION CATEGOAV/)NFDRMAT ION NEEDS CRI TEAIA VALUE RANGE ACC RESOL UNI TS RESP lvPE RCP Trip RCS Pressure In SG U-tubes loss than RCS saturation pressure.(RCI'rip/Restart Grnrrlc lssur.Background Document, Section 2.3.1.1.)2.SI Termlnat lon n.Flow Into RCS exceeds floe out of RCS (Sl Termlnatlon/
Ro lnl t I at Ion Background Document.Sect Ion 2.1)b.Sl pump floe Is zero: RCS pressure grenter thnn Sl pump shutoff head (SI T or m Inn t I on/Re In I t In t I on Qnckground Document, Sect lon 2.I)c.RIIR pump flow Is zero;RCS pr essure groat r than RIIR pump shutof f head.(E-I Background Document.Section 4.0.SDT for Step 9)P Less than G Less than P Stab or Incr G Stnb or Incr P Greater thnn G Greater than P Greater than G Greater than 1300 Pl Value Vnlue 1630 P2 P3 1170-1430 NA 1600-2235 1470-1790 270-330 NA 300 h 100 N 300 A 100 N 100 h 100 N 20 NA 50 NA 20 20 PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG!0 NA 10 NA 10 NA 10 Char aeter lst lcs Table CllARACTERISTICS aNSTIFICATION TABLE CONTROLS/INDICATION:
SI Puap Discharge Va'ives ERG REOUIREMENTS C"hRACTERI STICS ACTION CATEGORY/INFORMATION NEEDS 1.Verify equip+ant status: Valves that are required to be open to provide S I f 1 ov to the RCS are open.(E-0 Backpround Document~Sect ion 4, SDT for Step I 1)open open CRITERIA open POSITIONS RESP.TIME NA TYPE Discrete Discrete COMllENTS 2.Character lst lcs Table
CIIARACI'ERI ST ICS COMPA'R I SON SIIMMARY TAIILE INS I RUMENI Al ION RANGE ACCURACY RESOL tINI TS RESP TYPE COMMENTS l.RCS Pressure 0-2750 300 A NA 20 PSIG PSIG 10 sec.NA C.T, D C.T, 0 2.Pressurtzrr Level 0-100 NA 10A, 5N NA NA 5 sec.C, T C, T 3.PR7R Pressure G 1700-2500 NA IIO A.10 N NA 20 NA PSIG PSIG 5 sec.C, T, D C.T.D 4.SG Narrow Range Level G 0-100 NA 25 A, 5 N NA 5 sec.C, T, D C, T Chnractrr 1st les Summary lnblo
0 CHARACTERISTICS COMPARISON SUR"AARY TABLE CONTROLS/INDICATION POSITIONS RESP.TIME TYPE COMMENTS 1.SI Pump Dtscharge Valves P open,closed 6 open.c)oned 60 secs.0lscrete Olscrete 2.3.0 n tO lD.hnractet 1st les Summary Table
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS TABLE SYSTEH: Reactor Coolant INSTRUHENTATION:
RCS Pressure (NPS-121,122)
UNITS'SIG RANGE: 0 to 2750 RESOLUTION:
20 ACCURACY: 100 (normal containment);
300 (adverse containment)
RESPONSE TIHE: 10 seconds TYPE: Continuous; trending;discrete CRITERIA RE UIREMENTS PROCEOURE STEP 1.Less than 1630 psig 2.Less than 300 psig 3.Less than 1250 psig E-0 E-0 E-0 E-1.E-3 10 10 35C 21 1 1 4.Stable or increasing 5.Greater than 300 psig E-0 E-1 ES-1.1 ES-1.2 E-3 E-0 E-1 ES-1.2 f-3 25 35 6 9 5 9 5 2 35 9 14 5 12C 12 Figure 12 5607Y
CONTROL/INDICATION REQUIREMENTS TABLE SYSTEH;Emergency Core Cooling CONTROL/INDICATION:
SI Pump Discharge Valves Control and Status (ICH-260, 265)POSITIONS:
Open/Close RESPONSE TIHE: 10 seconds TYPE: Discrete CRITERIA RE UIREHENTS Open/Close PROCEDURE E-0 FR-C.l FR-H.l STEP ll 16 23 ll Figure 13 5607Y
ICCR Basis Documentation The results of the ICCR evaluation process will be provided in an Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Basis Document.This document will consist of the following major sections: 1)Introduction 2)Description of Operator Function Evaluation Process 3)Description of Operator Function Information and Control Needs For each operator function summary documentation will be provided to describe: a)operator action categories b)information and control needh.c)plant systems required to provide information and control needs d)instrumentation and controls required to provide information and control needs 4)Description of Instrumentation and Control Characteristics For each instrument and control identified in Item 3), the Characteristics Justification Tables will be provided to identify the required generic and.plant specific characteristics.
The basis for the identified characteristics will be established by referencing appropriate discussion in Section 3 above, and/or the appropriate information in the generic ERG background documentation or plant specific documentation.
5607Y-29 i
5)Comparison of Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Characteristics Comparison Tables will be provided for instrumentation and controls.These tables will identify generic and plant specific characteristics.
Com liance with NRC Clarification The primary intent of the ICCR activity is to address clarification items 2, 3 and 4 from the NRC March 29, 1984 meeting.Item 2 (development of a process)is described in Section 2.2, Definition of the ICCR process.Item 3 (identification of generic instrumentation and control characteristics and plant specific deviations) is described in Section 2.2, subsections 5 and 6.Item.4 (development and justification of instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs)will be provided in the ICCR Basis Documentation as described in Section 2.2.In su+nary, the ICCR program plan described herein defines a process which identifies instrumentation and control characteristics based on the information and control needs identified in the ERG background documentation and the plant-specific EOPs.In addition, basis documentation will be provided to identify how the needed characteristics of the instruments and controls were determined and to justify any deviations from the generic ERG instrumentation and controls.5607Y
3.
SUMMARY
OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION The documentation resulting from the SRTA program will consist of the following:
o Element Tables The element tables identify the operator actions necessary for response to emergency transients, including identif'cation of specific instrumentation and control requirements necessary for implementation of operator actions.These tables are developed in Phase 1 of the SRTA program.o Instrumentation and Control Requirements Tables The Requirements Tables compile the specific criteria and characteristic requirements for instrumentation and controls necessary for implementation of operator actions.These tables are developed and specific criteria are identified in Phase 1 of the SRTA program.Characteristics are identified in Phase 2 and added to the sub]ect tables.Separate tables are provided for each instrument or control.o System Sequence Hatrice The System Sequence Hatrices identify the sequence in which the operator uses plant systems in response to emergency transients.
Separate matrices are provided for each selected EOP that is task analyzed.These matrices are developed in Phase 1 of the SRTA program.5607 Y-31
o Instrumentation and Controls Characteristic Basis Oocumentation The basis for instrumentation and controls characteristics will be provided in this basis documentation.
This document wi 11 describe the ICCR process and the operator functional response to emergency transients.
It will include the following tables that are developed as part of the ICCR process.o Characteristics Justification Tables These tables will identify and justify operator actions, associated information and control needs and characteristics for instrumentation and controls.Separate tables are provided for each instrument and control.o Characteristics Comparison Summary Tables These tables will summarize the limiting characteristics for instrumentation and controls.Separate tables are provided for instrumentation and controls.This document and included tables will be developed in Phase 2 of the SRTA program.5607Y
4.USE OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION IN VERIFICATION OF OPERATOR TASK PERFORMANCE CAPABILITY The objective of Verification of Operator Task Performance capability is to assure that operator tasks can be performed in the existing control room with minimum potential for human error.Verification evaluates task execution at each work station and consists of: o Verification of Availability Verification of the presence (or absence)of instruments and equipment that provide the information and control capabilities necessary to implement operator actions.o Verification of Suitability Verification that the man-machine interfaces provided by the displays controls and other control room features are effectively designed to support operator actions, The task analysis documentation is structured to support a Verification process consisting of verification of operator action performance capability and verification of instrumentation and control characteristics.
The following subsections describe the use of the task analysis documentation in supporting these two activities of the verification process.Verification of 0 erator Action Performance Ca abi lit The first verification activity consists of evaluating the availability and suitability of control room instrumentation and controls to support performance of operator actions.The Element Tables are used for this activity.These tables present the operator actions and associated instrumentation and control requirements identified in Phase 1 of the task analysis program.5607Y
For each Element Table, the multidisciplinary CRDR review team systematically reviews the operator actions itemized under the ACTIONS heading.As each action is reviewed, the CRDR team locates the instrumentation and controls in the control room necessary to support the operator actions.Having located the instrumentation and controls, the team evaluates the suitability of the instrumentation and controls for performing the operator actions.The suitability evaluation is structured to evaluate the specific operator action criteria (e.g., greater than 1500 psig, less than 700'F, etc.)upon which operator actions are based.The team utilizes the information under the INSTRUMENTATION and the CONTROLS headings to identify criteria requirements.
In working through each Element Table, the team evaluates all entrees under the ACTIONS, INSTRUMENTATION and CONTROLS headings to ensure that the task analysis documentation is complete and self-consistent.
Verification of Instrumentation and Control Characteristics The second verification activity consists of evaluating the adequacy of instrumentation and control characteristics to support performance of operator actions.The Instrumentation and Controls Requirements Tables are used for this activity.These Tables summarize the required characteristics identified and justified in Phase 2 of the Task Analysis program.Characteristic verification consists of both verification of the human factors characteristics associated with the instrumentation (i.e., units, range, resolution and type)and controls (i.e., type and positions) and verification of design characteristics associated with the instrumentation (i.e., accuracy and response time)and controls (response time).Verification of human factors characteristics is performed in the control room mockup.The multidisciplinary CRDR team evaluates the subject characteristics for each instrument and control using the information on the Requirements Tables.Each table is systematically reviewed as part of this activity.5607Y Verification of design characteristics is accomplished through a table top evaluation of the actual design characteristics relative to the required characteristics identified through the task analysis program.5607Y 5.USE OF TASK ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION IN VALIDATION OF OPERATOR FUNCTIONS The objective of Validation of Control Room Functions is to determine whether the functions of the control room operating crew can be accomplished effectively within (1)the structure of defined emergency operating procedures, and (2)the design of the control room as it exists.Validation evaluates operator function execution within the integrated control room configuration and consists of walk and talk-throughs of selected event sequences with control room personnel.
The emergency operating procedures are the appropriate documents for use by the control room personnel in directing their response to the selected event sequences.
Although not specifically developed or needed for Validation, the Element Tables of the SRTA program will be used by the multidisciplinary CRDR team as a source document with which to observe the response of the operators to the event sequences.
Since the Element Tables are developed based on the procedures, these tables itemize detailed operator actions and associated instrumentation and control requirements necessary for proper response to emergency transients.
This documentation should be consistent with and reflect the actions and associated instrumentation and controls that are used by the operators in the walk and talk-throughs.
Through comparing the actions in the Element Tables with the operator walk-through actions, discrepancies will be noted and discussed in the talk-through portion of the validation.
5607Y 6.REFERENCES 1)Westinghouse Owners Group, Emergency Response Guidelines System Review and Task Analysis, Yolumes 1, 2A, 2B and 3, April 1, 1983.2)NRC Memorandum from H.Brent Clayton to Oennis L.Ziemann, Meeting Summary-Task Analysis Requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737, March 29, 1984.Meeting with Westinghouse Owners Group (WOG)Procedures Subcommittee and Other Interested Persons, April 5, 1984.3)U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission, NUREG 0700, Guidelines for Control Room Oesign Reviews, September, 1981.5607Y
APPENDIX A NRC CLARIFICATION OF TASK ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS General Section 5 (Detailed Control Room Design Review)of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 requires the use of function review and task analysis techniques to identify control room operator information and control needs during emergency operations.
Section 7 (Upgrade Emergency Operating Procedures) of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 states that the reanalysis of transients and accidents required in Item I.C.l of NUREG-0737 will identify operator information and control needs for emergency operations.
In their review of utility procedure generation package (PGP)submittals and control room design review (CRDR)program plan submittals (including the WOG System Review and Task Analysis documentation referenced in a number of program plans', the NRC saw instrumentation and control (equipment) requirements identified but did not see information and control needs identified.
This resulted in a number of NRC comments on utility PGPs and program plans in the area of task analysis, requesting the identification of operator information and control needs.To support utilities in addressing these'RC comments on task analysis, the WOG participated in a March 29 meeting with the NRC to clarify this topic and describe how operator information and control needs were addressed in the Emergency Response Guideline Development Program.At the March 29 meeting, the WOG representatives told the NRC that the operators'eeds (information and control)were identified and evaluated as part of the development program for the Emergency Response Guidelines.
The process for ERG development was'a multidisciplined and iterative process wherein operator response strategies and technical guidance were developed to address operator needs in response to emergency transients.
The technical guidance (guidelines) defines the actual generic tasks (guideline steps and actions)and generic instrumentation and control requirements necessary to implement these response strategies.
Consequently, operator information and 5607Y
control needs are not explicitly identified in the guidelines
~Although not specifically required per NUREG-0737 Item I.C.l, these information and control needs that were identified during the development program for the ERGs are contained in the ERG background documentation (the background documentation for the Revision 1 ERGs was subsequently transmitted to the NRC in early May 1984).To put the ERG System Review and Task Anaysis (SRTA)program in perspective, the WOG representatives told the NRC that this program was developed to provide a task analysis methodology and example documentation based on the ERGs (Basic version).The program was structured to compile operator tasks and instrumentation and control requirements as an input to the CROR process.It was not intended to identify operator information and control needs.Following the WOG presentation and subsequent NRC caucus, the NRC provided the following comments: 1)Based on the presentations by Mr.McKinney and Mr.Surman, it appears that Revision 1 of the ERG and background documents do provide an adequate basis for generically identifying information and control needs, 2)Each licensee and applicant, on a plant-specific basis, must describe the process for using the generic guidelines and background documentation to identify the characteristics of needed instrumentation and controls.For the information of this type that is not available from the ERG and background documentation, licensees and applicants must describe the process to be used to generate this information (e.g., from transient and accident analyses)to derive instrumentation and control characteristics.
This process can be described in either the PGP or OCROR Program Plan with appropriate cross-referencing.
5607V 3)For potentially safety-significant plant-specific deviations from the ERG instrumentation and controls, each licensee and applicant must provide in the PGP a list of the deviations and their justification.
These should be submitted in the plant-specific technical guideline portion of the PGP, along with other technical deviations.
4)For each instrument and control used to implement the emergency operating procedures, there should be an auditable record of how the needed characteristics of the instruments and controls were determined.
These needed characteristics should be derived from the information and control needs identified in the background documentation of Revision 1 of the ERG or from plant-specific information.
5)It appears that the basic version of the ERG and background documentation provides an adequate basis for generically deriving information and control needs.However, because of the differences in the organization of the material in the background documents between Basic and Revision 1, it is apparent.that it would be easier to extract the needed information from the Revision 1 background documents.
In summary, the March 29 meeting served to clarify the subject of task analysis.The HRC comnents identified and discussed above further clarify (at the program level)their requi rements.These comments recognize the ERG background documentation as the generic documentation which identifies operator information and control needs.Utilities must develop a process and actual documentation which identifies instrumentation and control characteristics based on the information and control needs identified in the ERG background documentation and other plant-specific documentation.
Oefinition and clarification as to this process and the resultant documentation was not discussed at the March 29 meeting.5607Y
D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW CONTROL ROOM INVENTORY PROCEDURE Cook DCRDR Control Room Inventory Procedure Referring to the latest revisions of drawings 5523 thru 5530 and 5560 for D.C.Cook Unit One, enter panel abbreviation and item number on a Control Room Inventory Data Sheet for each and every item called out on the drawings, one sheet per panel item.Also enter unit number.2.Organize Control Room Inventory Data Sheets into sections by panel in alphabetical order.For example, the first panel is BA, the second is C, etc.3.Organize all CRI Data Sheets for a panel into numerical order.For example, BA-l, BA-2, etc.4.Referring the above mentioned drawings, and the Material Control Record Cross Reference by Control Panel, transfer all pertinent data contained thereon to the appropriate CRI Data Sheet, such as MED or EED Mark No., Make and Type of device, such as SB-1 switch or FOX boro H/A Station.5.Referring the above mentioned drawings, locate each panel item on the Photograph Mosaic, and fill out the CRI Data Sheets with the following information; exact name plate inscription, equipment position and color for switches and indicating lights;functions 6 meters for controller station;all applicable data for meters, recorders and knife switches.Note that annunciators status and monitor lights are further defined on Dwgs 98601 thru 98605.Note that Westinghouse control panel devices have special Data Sheets.6.Referring to the above mentioned drawings, check each panel item on the drawing found on the control panels in the Cook control rooms.Mark out items not found on Cook panels.Sketch in outline of any item found on panel but not on drawings and give it temporary item number and fill out CRI Data Sheet with all pertinent data.7.Remove marked out items Data Sheets from the CRI and add new Data Sheets for extra items found in Cook Control rooms.8.Refer to the MSK or ECP Drawings, System Descriptions, Flow Diagrams, Electrical Elementaries, Functional Diagrams, Mechanical Material Control Record.Fill in System and Subsystem on CRI Data Sheet.Often the nameplate inscription is very useful for this purpose.9.Check that nameplate inscription gives primary function of the device.If not, use reference material in step 8 to determine and enter after nameplate inscription, first word to be"Function:" 10.Periodically repeat steps 6 and 7 above to up date CRI with actual Cook control room status.
ll.Periodically check latest revisions of Dwgs 5523 thru 5530 and 5560 to update previously mentioned temporary panel item numbers.12.Periodically distribute latest revisions of Dwgs of 5523 thru 5530 and 5560 and corrected, updated or new CRI Data Sheets and list of necessary deletions.
Staffing 1..DCRDR Lead Engineer 2.AEPSC Engineers and Technicians from 1&C Section as assigned, under direction of Lead Engineer.
0 Cook DCRDR Control Room Inventory Refer ence Documents&Drawing Dwg.No.(1 or 2)-5521 General Arr'g't Control Room Unit No.(1 or 2)Shows location of each control panel in the control room and which panels are on Dwgs.5523 thru 5530 and 5560.2.Dwg.No.(1 or 2)-5523 thru 5530 Main Control Boards Front Panels (Panel Name Abbreviations, such as SG)Unit No.(1 or 2).Shows all equipment mounted on front of Control panels with a unique number for each item.The panel name abbreviation, plus the number identifier, are the Panel Item No., such as SG-209.The items on a particular panel are contained within the Control Room Inventory panel listing in numerical order.Thus the panels are listed within the Control Room Inventory in alphabetical order and each item within a panel are in numerical order.3.Material Control Record Cross-Reference by Control Panel Computer Data Listing printout sheets listing all items by panel and panel item number and showing function, description, vendor and mark number.The mark number is the MED (Mechanical Engineering Division)mark number, which is the unique identifier used for any item shown on all mechanical and electrical drawings, such as flow diagrams, metering and tubing drawings, electrical elementaries and wiring diagrams, MSK and ECP drawings, etc.Thus the panel item number is cross referenced to all mechanical, electrical and instrument/control drawings and documents.
The operating procedures, operator training documents and system description documents use the MED or EED Mark No.identifier scheme also.The description and vendor show what the panel mounted equipment is, for example, a General Electric (GE)SB-1 control switch.4.MSK Drawings Shows control and instrument loops in schematic form with MED and EED Mark No.identifiers.
Thus the panel item function within a control/instrument loop can be identified as well as the loop.function.
5.ECP Drawings Shows all information shown on MSK's plus additional information.
The MSK plus ECP drawings show all significant instrument/control loops in schematic form with MED or EED Mark No.identifiers for individual items.
6.System Descriptions Describes overall system functions, general description of system, design basis and description of equipment, instrumentation and controls and operation.
7.Mechanical Material Control Record Lists MED or EED Mark No., Vendor, Manufacturer, Make and Model Number, Description, Purchase Order Number.Thus all specifications, limits, features, applications, ranges, etc.can be identified as necessary.
8.Control Room Inventory Data Sheet Data entry sheet for all pertinent inventory data with panel item number and MED or EED Mark No.identifiers.
This data sheet has been formatted to provide a unique page for each panel item.This data sheet is a general purpose data sheet for all the various types of control panel equipment contained in the control rooms, therefore, all data entry blanks will not be filled in on each sheet, but only those necessary to the inventory.
A sample sheet is attached.Detailed instructions for data entries are attached.9.Functional Diagrams 98501 thru 98514 Shows Reactor, Reactor Coolant, Steam Generators and Containment instrumentation, control and protection systems functions.
10.Flow Diagrams 5104 thru 5150B&5660 thru 5662 Shows schematic arrangement of process piping, equipment and instrumentation.
11.Electrical Elementaries 98001 thru 98999 Shows schematic arrangement of all electrical equipment instrumentation, control and protection systems.(2-d)
Cook DCRDR Control Room Inventory Sheet Line by line description of entries, starting at top left of page, refer to attached blank sample.Name Plate Inscription (2,35)The exact lettering as found on name plates and tags located on, beside, above or below the device.Usually it is an engraved phenolic plate with black background and white lettering which is located directly above the ctevice;many horizontal and vertical indicators have the name plate engraving on the meter scale plate itself.However, also included are temporary nane plate legends such as stamped stick on tape.The numbers in parenthesis above are for future ccmputer data bank entry, the first set of numbers give the location;the second set the number of letters, numbers and spaces that can be entered.These numbers in parenthesis appear with all the succeeding entries also, and the rules are the same.Location: Panel (3,3)Item I (4,3)The panel designation goes after Panel, such as BA for the Boric Acid Panel.The panel item n~goes after Item I and is the sana number found on AEP Ccok drawings 1-5523 through 1-5530, each device on each control panel then has an unicycle identification number.MED I (6,6), the AEP Mechanical Engineering Division tag numbers are entered here, such as RP1-100 or AJ-26.These tag numbers are the primary AEP identifier, and appear on flow diagrams, instrumentation and control drawings, system descriptions, etc.EED I (7,6), the AEP Electrical Engineering Division tag numbers are entered here, such as 101TD7.Again these numbers are a primary AEP identifier, and appear on flow diagrams, instrumentation and control drawings, system description, electrical elementaries and wiring drawings, etc.With rare exceptions, every panel rmunted item will have either an MED or EED number.An exanple of the exception would be some of the General Electric EHC system control panel mounted ecplipment o System (10,35)Subsystem (11,35)entries for system show the mayor ecpupment or group of ecpupnents that perform a specific system function essential to system operation.
Where possible, these entries follow the AEP flow diagram system designations or Westinghouse system ncmenclatures.
Entries for subsystem, where applicable, show the major~nents or group of cxxqnnents a particular activity or group of related tasks that are essential to system operation.
Page 1 of 4
Ecpi~t (12,35)entries here show the actual panel anunted device or the~nent that the panel mounted device interfaces with.The vast majority of the Cook Unit contxol panel rmunted devices are control stations, such as General Electric SB-1 switches, Cutler Haaaer switches or pushbuttons, Foxboro AT switches, Bailey Wtex and Foxboro hand-auto stations or manual loaders or manual stations, etc;or indicators, such as pressure, temperature or flow indicators, recorders, indicating lights, status lights, monitor lights, annunciators, etc.Therefore, the remainder of the sheet has a standardized format for data entries for switches, indicating lights, controller stations, meters, recorders, annunciators and knife (test)switches.Only those categories that apply are filled out.In som cases, because of the data format, the equipment data entries may contain redundant information to the data entries under the below categories.
A brief explanation of each category follows: Switch: Yudel (13,6)(S,M,P)Entries here are SB-1 for General Electrics SB series switches, CH for Cutler H-amer, etc.The various labeled positions of the switch are circled where applicable, and nonstandard positions are written out after Other (20.1)An S entered in blank means spring return and an M means maintained position.Indication Lights: Model (21,6)(RPGP WPAP BPC)(I)The entxies after model are ala@st always EZ-16 or blank to represent General Electrics ET-16 lights.The initials R,G,W,A,B or C are used in the blanks after (22,1), (23,1), (24,1), (25,1)or (26,1)where applicable.
Nhat the light represents is circled where applicable and the color of the lens is represented by the initial in the blank space;where R=Red, G=Gmen, white, A=Amber, B=Blue and C=Clear.Non standard entries are written out after Other (26,1)Controller Station: Rx2el (27,15)The entries after model are generally Bailey AJ for a Bailey Meter pneumatic hand-auto station, Bailey AL for Bailey latex pneumatic manual loader, Fox 62KB for Foxboro electronic hand-auto station, Fish AC2 for Fisher Governor electronic H/A station, etc.Functions; a checkmark after Manual (28.1)neans manual station only, a checkmark after Auto/Manual (29,1)smans a hand/auto station, and if the H/A station bas a'special feature, a entry is made after either Bias (30,1), Tieback (31,1)or Setpoint (32.1)Meters;(APBPC D), the scaling of the various meters on the station is entered after Cutput (33,1), Position (34,1), Deviation (35,1), B,T,S (36,1), Transfer (37,1)and 3masured Variable (38,1)The scale range is entered first, such as 0-100 which represents zero to 100 per cent, or 0-14" which represents zero to 14 inches, the various scale divisions are entered next, such as 25,5 which represents 25 percent major divisions and 5 per Page 2 of 4 cent minor divisions.
An example of a Bailey AJ station output aeter would be Output (33,1)0-100,10,5 which represents 0 to 100%scale range with 10%major divisions and 5%minor division marks.¹ter: Entries are made in this section for all gages, meters, indicators, etc., except those included on a H/A or manual station.Mx2el (39.6)exanples of these entries would be GE AB-40 for General Electric Hodel AB-40, PG for Bailey Mter model PG, etc.Measured Variable (40,15)would be AC for alternating current, DC for direct cuxrentf flowf pressure, t~ature, etc.A checkmark after Digital (41,3)or Analog (42,3)is self explanatory, Engg.Units (44.6)show the unit of measure, such as GPM=gallons per minute, PPH or ()/hr or lhs/tu'pounds per hour, PSIG=pounds per square inch,'F=degrees Fahrenheit, etc.Units/Graduation (45,3)and Fram (48,4)and To (49,4)define the scale range and divisions.
An example would he.1>>.lANA 400 represents a range of zero to 400 which major divisions at 100, minor divisions at 50, and subminor marks at 10.Qn same meters after the number entered in To (49,4)is shown Sq Rt which represents square root for flow neter scales without square root extraction on orifice or flow nozzle installations.
A checkmark after Linear (46,1)nmans the pointer novas in a straight line, horizontally or vertically, not the linearity of the scale divisions.
So a chen)murk will appear after Linear (46,1)or Circular (47,1)for all analog meters.Hecorder: Entries for recorders require a second sheet in addition to the entries on this sheet.Model (50,15)are Fax for Foxhoro, Hagan for Westinghouse Hagan, West for Westzonics, etc.Chart Speed (in/min)(51,3)are shown as 3/4in/hr or 3in/hr which represents 3/4 and 3 inches per hour Con.tinuous (C)or Cycletzme (sec.)(52,93)Enter C for all but multipoint recorders, enter number of seconds (tim)between prints for multipoint recorders.
Knife Switch: Switch I 1 thru 10 E.E.I.D.()
(56,15)Function (57, 14)thru (66, 14)Fill in switch function data plate inscription for each switch used.Page 3 of 4
COCK DCRDR Control Room Inventory Sheets Line by line description of entries, stmMng at top left of suppleaentaxy page required for recorders, refer to blank sample attached.Recorder: IDg (2,15)Enter MED 5 from first page Name (3, 15)Enter Name Plate Inscription fran first page Tag 5, Enter point or pen identification plate inscription MED"for each input, for example, QIA-610 Description, Enter point or pen identification plate inscription description of each input, for example, Holdup Tank No.1 Level Pt 0/Color, Enter point or pen identification plate data for point number or pen color Alarm Contact Utilization, enter chart value where alarm contacts are energized and direction of action, for example 500'F dec (decreasing)
Engg.Units thru Circ/Linr entries use some rules described under Meter.Page 4 of 4
D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW CONTROL ROOM HUMAN FACTORS SURVEY
INTRODUCTION The Control Room Human Factors Survey will be divided into fourteen separate tasks, each with a specific set of related control room design features organized into a task plan.These fourteen tasks are: 1.1 Workspace Survey 1.2 Anthropometric Survey 1.3 Emergency Equipment Survey 1.4 Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition, Survey 1.5 Illumination Survey 1.6 Ambient Noise Survey 1.7 Maintainability Survey 2.1 Communications Survey 3.1 Annunciator System Review 4.1 Controls Survey 5.1 Displays Survey-6.1 Labels and Location Aids Survey F 1 Computers System 8.1 Conventions All task plans follow the general format of, 1)Introduction (to include the objectives) 2)Review Team Selection and Responsibilities 3)Criteria (from NUREG-0700, Section 6.0)4)Procedures 5).Equipment and Facility Requirements 6)Inputs and Data Forms 7)Outputs and Results 8)Figures and Tables 9)Procedure Exceptions 10)Appendices (as required).
A copy of the Annunciator System review task plan is attached as an example.Following the Control Room Human Factors surveys the completed Survey Task Plan will be added to the Control Room Design data file.
TP-3.1 1 May 1983 HUMAN FACTORS TASK PLAN FOR THE AMCJNCIATOR SYSTEM REVIEW The Essex Corporation 333 North Fairfax Street Alexandria, Virginia 22314 (703)548-4500 Conditionally Approved.Pending Technical Review Committee final approval.Approved fer~Signature 1 May 1983 (DOate Walter T.Talley-Manager, Systems Analysis Branch Printed Name and Title 1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 RECORD OF REVISIONS Rev.No.Rev.Date Descri tion ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 TABLE OF CONTENTS:~~1.0 OB ELECTIVES 2.0 REVIEW TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
3.0 CRITERIA
4.0 PROCEDURES
4.1 General
Instructions 4.2 Data Collection 4D Analysis 5.0 EQUIPMENT/FACILITY REQUIREMENTS
6.0 INPUTS
AND DATA FORMS 7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES 9.0 PROCEDURE EXCEPTIONS
~Pa e 0 A.CRITERIA B.DATA FORMS C.CRITERIA MATRIX D.TASK PLAN CRITIQUE APPENDICES A-1 B-l C-1 D-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.0 OBJECTIVES a.To assess to what degree the annunciator system conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
b.To identify and document any features in the annunciator system design that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
2.0 REVIEW
TEAM SELECTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES a.A human factors specialist to conduct the data collection and analysis and to prepare the task report.b.A client nuclear operations specialist to supply plant systems information concerning alarm parameters and alarm response procedures.
c.A client plant INC engineer to assist in identifying relevant plant systems information.
3.0 CRITERIA
The criteria are from NUREG-0700, paragraphs 6.>.l.l, 6.3.1.2a through d(2), 68.1.3a through d, 6D.1.4a and b, 6D.1.5a through b(3), 6D.2.1a through f, 6.3.>.la through b(2), 6.3.2.2a and b, 6.3.3.1a through c(3), 66.3.2a through f(2), 6.3.3.3a through f, 6D.3.4a through d, 6D.3.5a through d(6), 6D.4.1a through d(2), 6.3.4.2a.through c, 6.3.4.3a and b, 6.5.1.6a through d(2), and 6.6.6.2a (see Appendix A).4.0 PROCEDURES
4.1 General
Instructions
4.1.1 Preparation
and Conduct of Procedures a.Prior to conduct of this task, ensure that all required data forms, plant documentation, engineering drawings, equipment, and materials are available.
Ensure that permission has been obtained for all required access to the control room or other plant areas.b.Record all exceptions, deviations, or changes to these procedures in Section 9.0 of this Task Plan.Number each entry sequentially, starting with 1.Include an explanation (technical justification) as to why the exception, deviation, or change was made.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 4.1.2 Task Plan Critique Upon completion of this task, fill out the Task Plan Critique contained in Appendix D.Submit the completed critique to your supervisor or project manager.4.2 Data Collection a.Data are collected using various methods and procedures consisting of measurements, observations, interviews and questionnaires, and document reviews.Appendix C illustrates the distribution of the criteria for the various methods.b.Measurements and observations should be made for all items contained on the Measurements data forms and Observations checklists contained in Appendix B.c.The operator questionnaire (Appendix B)should be administered to at least 50 percent of the licensed reactor operators for the plant.Administration may be conducted singly or in a group, but should be proctored or monitored.
d.The results of the Conventions, Labels, Maintainability, and System, Function and Task Analysis tasks should be reviewed for annunciator-relevant data (reference criteria 6.3.3slc(l), (2), (3);6D.3.3b and d(2);6.3.4.2b(l) through b(4);6.3.4.3a;6.5.1.6a through d;and 6.6.6.2(a).
e.In addition to the review results from d, above, plant documentation should be reviewed to verify the items listed in the Document Review Checklist in-Appendix B.The required plant documents include: l.Annunciator Response Procedures 2.Administrative Procedures relevant to annunciators.
4.3~Anal sls a.All deviations from the criteria shall be recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED)reports (Appendix B).Recorded information shall include the instru-ment or instruments involved (e.g., auditory alarm horns, specific light tiles, etc.), a description of the problem including the 0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.b.Data collection method(s)shall also be recorded on the HED form.Where data from two or more sources are contradictory, resolution of the conflict through data review and client interview shall be made.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 c.Use the analysis aids from Appendix B for all data reduction and analysis.Upon completion of all analyses, ensure that the criteria in Appendix A are properly annotated (as specified in the analysis aids).d.Submit the completed task plan to your immediate supervisor for review.Upon project management approval, initiate Task Report 3.1.5.0 EQUIPMENT AM3 FACILITY REQUIREMENTS a.Access to the control room.b.Sound le.el meter.c.Protractor and tape measure.d.Flash comparator.
6.0 INPUTS
AND DATA FORMS a.Annunciator Response Procedures b.Annunciator Administrative Procedures c.Completed Task Reports for: 1.System Function and Task Analysis 2.Conventions 3.Labels and Location Aids d0 e.4.Maintainability Criteria List (Appendix A)The following from Appendix B: 1.Measurements Data Forms 2.Questionnaire 3.Observations Checklist 4.Documentation Review Checklist 5.Analysis Aids 6.HED Report Forms Criteria Matrix (Appendix C)Task Plan Critique Form (Appendix D)7.0 OUTPUTS AND RESULTS a.Completed HEDs b.Completed Task Report.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 8.0 FIGURES AND TABLES None.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 9.0 PROCEDURE EXCEPTIONS The following exceptions, deviations, and changes were made to these procedures during conduct of the task (include a statement of justification on each item): I I I-~~1
.ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983APPENDIX A CR ITER IA~.4*
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 6.3.1.1 GENERAL SYSTEM DESIGN Annunciator warning systems are the primary control room interface to immediately alert the operator to out-of-tolerance changes in plant con-dition.Annunciator warning systems consist of three major subsystems: (a)an auditory alert subsystem, (b)a visual alarm subsystem, and (c)an operator response subsystem (see Exhibit 6.3-1).Together, these three subsystems should be designed to provide a preferred operational sequence for annunciator warnings as indicated in Exhibit 6.3 2'.N/A YES NO CONHENTS 6.3.1.2 ALARM PARAMETER SELECTION a.b.C.SET POINTS-The limits or set points for initiating the annunciator warning system should be established to meet the following goals: (1)Alarms should not occur so frequently as to be considered a nuisance by the operators, (2)However, set points should be established to give operators adequate time to re-spond to the warning condition before a serious problem develops.GENERAL ALARMS (1)Alarms that require the control room operator to direct an auxiliary operator to a given plant location for specific information should be avoided.(2)If general alarms must be used, they should only be used for conditions that allow adequate time for auxiliary operator action and subsequent control room operator action.MULTICHANNEL OR SHARED ALARMS (1)Annunciators with inputs from more than one plant parameter set point should be avoided.Multi-input alarms that summarize single-input annunciators elsewhere in the control room are an exception.
(2)Where multi-input annunciators must be used, an alarm printout capability should be provided.The specifics of the alarm should be printed on an alarm typer with sufficient speed and buffer storage to capture all alarm data.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 6,3.1.2 ALARM PARAMETER SELECTION (Cont'd)N/A YES NO COMMENTS c.MULTICHANNEL OR SHARED ALARMS (Cont'd)(3)A ref lash capability should be provided to allow subsequent alarms to activate the auditory alert mechanism and ref lash the visual tile even though the first alarm may not have been cleared.d.MULTI.UNIT ALARMS-(1)Alarms for any shared plant systems should be duplicated in all control rooms..(2)When an item of shared equipment is being operated from one control room, a status display or signal should be pro-vided in all other control rooms which could potentially control this equipment.
6.3.1.3 FIRST OUT ANNUNCIATORS a.REACTOR SYSTEM (1)A separate first out panel should be provided for the reactor system.(2)The first out panel should consist of separate annunciator tiles for each of the automatic reactor trip functions.
(3)In the event of a reactor trip, the tile associated.
with the event should illuminate, and no other.b.TURBINE-G ENERATOR SYSTEM-A separate first out panel, similar in function to the reactor system panel, is recommended.
c.POSITION-First out panels should be located directly above the main control work station for the system.d.APPLICATION-First out annunciators should conform to the general auditory, visual, and operator response guidelines of this section.A-2
ANNUNClATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 6.3.1.4 PRIOR ITIZATION a.LEVELS OF PRIORITY (1)Prioritization should be accomplished using a relatively small (24)number of priority levels.N/A YES NO COMMENTS (2)Prioritization should be based on a continuum of importance, severity, or need for operator action in one or more dimensions, e.g., likelihood of reactor trip, release of radiation.
Exhibit 6.3-3 provides an example of prioritization based on three levels of prioritization.
b.PRIORITY CODING (1)Some method for coding the visual signals for the various priority levels should be employed.Acceptable methods for priority coding include color, position, shape, or symbolic coding.(2)Auditory signal coding for priority level is also appropriate.
See Guideline 6.2.2.3 for recommended coding techniques.
6.3.1.5 CLEARED ALARMS a.AUDITORY SIGNAL-Cleared alarms should have a dedicated, distinctive audible signal which should be of finite duration.b.VISUAL SIGNAL-The individual tile should have one of the following:
(1)A special flash rate (twice or one.half the normal flash rate is preferred, to allow discrimination), or (2)Reduced brightness, or (3)A special color, consistent with the overall control room color coding scheme, pro-duced by a differently.
coloreo bulb behind the tile.A-3
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 6.3.2.1 SIGNAL DETECTION tl/A YES NO COMMENTS aO b.C.INTENSITY-The signal should be such that operators can reliably discern the signal above the ambient control room noise.A nominal value of 10 dB(A)above average ambient noise is generally adequate.CONTROL-Signal intensity, if adjustable, should be controlled by administrative procedure.
LIMITS-The signal should capture the operator's attention but should not cause irritation or a startled reaction.d.e.DETECTION-Each auditory signal should be adjusted to resutt in approximately equal detection levels at normal operator work stations in the primary operating area.RESET-The anhunciator auditory alert mechanism should automatically reset when it has been silenced.f.IDENTIFICATION-The operator should be able to identify the work station or the system where the auditory alert signal originated.
Separate auditory signals at each work station within the primary operating area are recommended.
6.3.2.2 AUDITORY CODING a.LOCALIZATION (1)Auditory coding techniques should be used when the operator work station associated with the alarm is not in the primary operating area.(2)Coded signals from a single audio source should not be used to identify individual work stations within the primary oper-ating area.b.PRIORITIZATION-Coding may be used to indicate alarm priority.(See Guideline 6.3.1.4,)
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 6,3.3.1 VISUAL ANNUNCIATOR PANELS LOCATION-Visual alarm panels should be located above the related controls and displays which are required for corrective or diagnostic action in response to the alarm.(See Exhibit 6.34.)LABELING (1)Each panel should be identified by a label above the panel.(2)Panel identification label height should be consistent with a subtended visual angle of at least 15 minutes when viewed from a central position within the primary operating area.N/A YES COMMENTS 6,3.3.2 VISUAL ALARM RECOG AND IDENT C.a.b.d.FLASHING-The specific tile(s)on an annun-ciator panel should use flashing illumination to indicate an alarm condition.
FLASH RATE-Flash rates should be from three to five flashes per second with approxi-mately equal on and off times.FLASHER FAILURE-In case of flasher failure of an alarmed tile, the tile tight should illuminate and burn steadily.CONTRAST D ETECTAB IL ITY-There should be high enough contrast between alarming and steady-on tiles, and between illuminated and non-illuminated tiles, so that operators in a normally illuminated control room have no problem discriminating alarming, steadywn, and steadywff visual tiles,"DARK" ANNUNCIATOR PANELS-A"dark" annunciator panel concept should be used.This means that under normal operating conditions no annunciators would be illumi-nated;all of the visual tiles of the annunciator panels would be"dark." EXTENDED DURATION ILLUMINATION-If an annunciator tile must be"ON" for an extended period during normal operations (e.g., during equipment repair or replacement), it should be: (1)Distinctively coded for positive recog-nition during this period, and (2)Controlled by administrative procedures.
A-5 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 6.3.3.3 ARRANGEMENT OF VISUAL ALARM TILES a.MATR IX ORGANIZATION
-Visual alarms should be organized as a matrix of visual alarm tiles within each annunciator panel.b.FUNCTIONAL GROUPING-Visual alarm tiles should be grouped by function or system within each annunciator panel.For example, area radiation alarms should be grouped on one panel, not spread throughout the control room.c.LABELING OF AXES (1)The vertical and horizontal axes of annunciator panels should be labeled with alphanumerics for ready coordinate designation of a particular visual tile.(2)Coordinate designation is preferred on the left and top sides of the annunciator panel.(3)Letter height for coordinate designation should be consistent with a subtended visual angle of at least 15 minutes as viewed from a central position within the primary operating area.d.PATTERN RECOGNITION-(1)The number of alarm tiles and the matrix density should be kept low (a maximum of 50 tiles per matrix is suggested).
(2)Tiles within an annunciator panel matrix should be grouped by subsystem, function, or other logical organization.
e.OUTF-SERVICE AL'ARMS-Cues for prompt recognition of an out-of-service annunciator should be designed into the system.f.BLANK TILES-Blank or unused annunciator tiles should not be illuminated (except during annunciator testing).6.3,3.4 VISUAL TILE LEGENDS~~~a.UNAMBIGUOUS
-Annunciator visual tile legends should be specific and unambiguous.
Wording should be in concise, short messages.b.SINGULARITY
-Alarms which refer the operator to another, more detailed annunciator panel located outside the primary operating area should be minimized.
N/A YES NO CONHENTS A-6 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 P\6,3,3,4 VISUAL TILE LEGENDS (Cont'd)c.SPECIFICITY
-Tile'egends should address specific conditions; for example, do not use one alarm for HIGH-LOW, TEMPERATURE-P R ESSUR E.d.ABBREVIATIONS-Abbreviations and acro-nyms should be consistent with those used elsewhere in the control room.N/A YES NO COMNENTS LETTER DIMENSIONS AND SPACING-(1)Stroke-width-to-cnaracter-height ratio should be between 1:6 and 1:8.(2)Letter width-to.height ratio should be between 1:1'and 3:5, (3)Numeral width-to.height ratio should be 3:5 6.3,3.5 VISUAL TILE READABILITY a.DISTANCE-The operator should be able to read all the annunciator tiles from the position at the work station where the annunciator acknowledge control is located.(1)Letter height should subtend a minimum visual angle of 15 minutes, or.004 x.viewing distance.The preferred visual angle is 20 minutes, or.006 x viewing dl sta n ca.(2)Letter height should be identical for all tiles, based on the maximum viewing distance.Separate calculations should be made for stand.up and sitdown work stations.b.TYPE STYLE-The size and style of lettering C*should meet the following:
(1)Type styles should be simple.(2)Type styles should be consistent on all visual tiles.(3)Only upper-case type should be used on~~~visual tiles.c, LEGEND CONTRAST-Legends should pro-vide high contrast with the tile background.
(1)Legends should be engraved, I (2)Legends should be dark lettering on a~~light background.
d, A-7 0
ANNUNC1ATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 (V 1.6.3.3.5 VISUAL TILE READABILITY (Cont'd)d.LETTER DIMENSIONS
'AND SPACING-(Cont'd)(4)Minimum space between characters should be one stroke width.(5)Minimum space between words should be the width of one character.
(6)Minimum space between lines should be one-half the character height.N/A YES tIO COHNENTS 1~" 6.3.4.1 CONTROLS (See Exhibit 6.3.5.)a.SILENCE (1)Each set of operator response controls should include a silence control.(2)It should be possible to silence an auditory alert signal from any set of annunciator response controls in the primary operating area.b.ACKNOWLEDGE (1)A control should be provided to terminate the flashing of a visual tile and have it continue at steady illumination until the alarm is cleared.(2)Acknowledgement should be possible only at the work station where the alarm originated.
c.RESET (1)If an automatic cleared alarm feature is not provided, a control should be pro-vided to reset the system after an alarm has cleared.(2)The reset control should silence any audible signal indicating clearance and should extinguish tile illumination.
(3)The reset control should be effective only at the work station for the annunciator panel where the alarm initiated.
d.TEST (1)A control to test the auditory signal and flashing illumination of all tiles in a panel should be provided.(2)Periodic testing of annunciators should be required and controlled by administrative procedure.
A-8 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 19S3 6,3.4.2 CONTROL SET DESIGN 80 b.C.POSITIONING OF REPETITIVE GROUPS-Repetitive groups of annunciator controls should have the same arrangement and relative location at different work stations.This is to facilitate"blind" reaching.CONTROL CODING-Annunciator response controls should be coded for easy recognition using techniques such as: (1)Color coding;(2)color shading the group of annunciator
'controls; (3)demarcating the group of annunciator controls;or (4)shape coding, particularly the silence control.(See Exhibit 6.3.5, Example 2.)NONDE F EATABLE CONTROLS-Annunci-ator control designs should not allow the operator to defeat the control.For example, some pushbuttons used for annunciator silencing and acknowledgement can be held down by inserting a coin in the ring around the pushbutton.
This undesirable design feature should be eliminated.
6.3.4.3 ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURES ao b.annunciator tile coor 6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING~~~AVAILABILITY-Annunciator response pro-cedures should be available in the control room.INDEXING-Annunciator respohse procedures should be indexed by panel identification and dinates.N/A YES NO COMMENTS a.b.REDUNDANCY-In all applications of color coding, color should provide redundant information.
That is, the pertinent information should be available from some other cue in addition to color.NUMBER OF COLORS (1)The number of colors used for coding should be kept to the minimum needed for providng sufficient information.
(2)The number of colors used for coding should not exceed 11.A-9 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 6.6.t.6 COLOR CODING (Cont'd)N/A YES NO COMMENTS C.d.MEANING OF COLORS (1)The meaning attached to a particular color should be narrowly defined.(2)Red, green, and amber (yellow)should be reserved for the following uses: Red: unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance.
Green: safe, no operator action required, or an indication that a parameter is within tolerance.
Amber (yellow): hazard (potentially un-safe), caution, attention required, or an indication that a marginal value or parameter exists.CONSISTENCY OF MEANING (1)The meaning assigned to particular colors should be consistent across all applications within the control room.(2)The meaning of a particular color should remain the same whether applied to panel surfaces or projected in signal lights or on CRTs.6.6.6.2 DEMARCATION ai b.C.USE-Lines of demarcation can be used to: (1)Enclose functionally related displays.(2)Enclose functionally related controls.(3)Group related controls and displays.CONTRAST-Lines of demarcation should be visually distinctive from the panel background.
PERMANENCE-Lines of demarcation should be permanently attached.A-10 e ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 e 0~AUDITORY ALERT SUBSYSTEM I (]VISUAL ALARM SUBSYSTEM OPERATOR RESPONSE SUBSYSTEM ,50(, Exhibit 6.3~1.Annunciator warning system.~~
Q ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 gentle Oto Eeoeodsd 7 yet Arrdrtoiy Alen Mecnsnron tnitietion
)Vrarel Anr>>rncretor
)Tile AClrre'lien Eeslly de~snd dmninrndsl
~~rrdrtery edna Orrernetrng Crom~Oertrcrr Ior M C4 Inset ron Screclttt rairkt ll4rrn toe in enrnrncator oenet lllrrrnrnsted ond tlmrno st~role~drdn tecrl~Wactren"SII.EIICE" Co>>trot Re cronre lA>>y MC4 I.ocetronl Arreltery Sle>>sr 4ear, ene Mecnonron Resets"ACIIIIOryI.EDGE;;
Co>>trot Reosonte lonly el MCS t.ocetern hoer A>>err>>c>ero Oe>>rrt Sleorr>>O Ceeeet t>>rt Toe Refnanl Illlrrnrneted Dree>>eri~end Rimed stion ol Oionran hent Peraneterl
~I heorrnsd to Hoiinel Avdnory Alon l Mecnenion lnrtret>>s>>
l~~p~~~d unrcrre Arrdrtery So>>Sr lor-Creaest-Atorrn Soscrer Ster>>O Rstr ot Vorret Tw lo Indoors"Cleaed-Alonn'et f.55 T Co>>trot Rearonre IOMr ot MCS Locetron tree'>>nliioierei Oe>>e i llo More AtrdrOIC~r Voorre Alenn"TEST-IAI Eecrl Soecild Arri>>rrdator Cont ror Se I L ecol re>>l lnldetes Arrdrtoiy Alert r>>ond ores oteenes All v~Tiles ln Rail Anrnrncrotor Pored(tl lf GEeso LW-E g+$>>ooeroror Acnon i i>>AeelaotW Cw Ide line Exhibit 6.3 2.Annunciator system preferred operational sequence.A-12
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 FIRST PRIORITY ALARMS~Plant shut down lreactor trip, turbine tripl~Radiation release~Plant conditions which, if not corrected immediately.
will result in wtomatic plant shutdown or radiation release, or will require manual plant shutdown.SECOND PRIORITY ALARMS~Technical specification violations which if not corrected will require plant shutdown~Plant conditions which, if not corrected, mey leaf to plant shut down or radiation releases THIRD PRIORITY ALARMS~Plant conditions representing problems le.g., system degredationl which effect plant operability but which should not Ised to plant shutdovm, radiation release, or violation of technical specifications Exhibit 6.3 3.Three-level annunciator prioritization example.easpwetae coKtsroL eksrtL VISUAL ALARMS<<0%A~st~clHS&os a I St[JJv CtNtl+ros I SIPED CIHtlLS s<SSLAJv CSHllkr RELATED.DISPLAYS(LJ LQ Rl I-tQ-ll ctlo gi Ausltlker SSIONAltt~PS LI L3 Ij.aaaw rttcwAtts tUavs Ijj X RE LATED CONTROLS Exhibit 6.34.Visual alarms located above the related controls and displays.(From Seminara et al., 1979).A-13
(Example 1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983: SILENCE ACKNOWLEDGE Example 2 ANNUNCIATOR CONTROLS::::::::::
~~~~'lN RESET TEST ACK RESET TEST Exhibit 6.3.5.Annunciator response controls.: Color Serial or selection number General color name ISCC-NBS Munsell renotstion of color-centroid name ISCC+IBS Centroid number lsbbrevistionl Color'J'1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 white black yellow purple orange light blue fed bull gray green purplish pink blue yellowish pink violet orange yellow purplish red greenish yellow reddish brown yellow green yellowish brown reddish orange olive green 263 267 82 218 48 180 11 90 265 139 247 178 26 207 66 255 97 40 115 75 34 126 white black v,y s.P v.O v.l.B v.R gy Y med.Gy v.G s,pPk s,B s.yPk s.V v.OY s.pR v.g Y s.fBr v.YG deep yBr v.rO d.OIG 2.5PB 95/02-'N 0.8/3.3Y 8.0/14.3 6,5P 4.3/9.2 4.1YR 6.5/15.0 2.7P 8 7.9/6.0 5,OR 3.9/15.4 4,4Y 7.2/3.8 3.3GY 5.4/0.1 3.2G 4.9/11.1 5.6RP 6.8/9.0 2.9P 8 4.1/10.4 8.4R 7.0/9.5 0.2P 3.7/10.1 8.6Y R 7.3/15.2 7.3RP 4.4/11.4 9.1Y 8.2/12.0 0.3Y R 3.1/9.9 5.4GY 6.8/11.2 B.BYR 3.1/5.0 99R 5.4/14.5 B.OGY 2.2/3.6 Exhibit 6.5 7.Twenty.two colors of maximum contrast (from Kelly, 1965).
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B DATA FORMS ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 8 DATA FORMS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 TABLE OF CONTENTS 81-MEASUREMENT DATA FORMS Bl.l Linear Measurements 81.2 Sound Measurements 81.3 Light Measurements 82-OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 83-OBSERVATION CHECKLIST 84-DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST 85-ANALYSIS AIDS 85.1 Linear Measurements Analysis 85.2 Sound Measurements Analysis 85.3 Light Measurements Analysis 86-OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE ANALYSIS 87-OBSERVATION CHECKLIST ANALYSIS 88-DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST ANALYSIS 89-SAMPLE HED REPORT FORM~Pa e Bl.1-1 81.1-1 81.2-1 Bl.3-1 82-1 83-1 84-1 85.1-1 85.1-1 85.2-1 85.3-1 86-1 87-1 88-1 89-1
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX Bl.l MEASUREMENTS DATA TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.LINEAR MEASUREMENTS (LABELING)
1.1 Annunciator
Light Box (ALB)Summary Labels-6.3.3.1b(2).
a.If there are no summary labels, check here: b.If there are summary labe'ls, measure and record in Table l.lb the following information:
ITEM NO.1)2)3)4)5)6)ITEM DESCRIPTION Character height Character width and/or numeral width Character strokewidth Character spacing Word spacing Line spacing TABLE l.lb ITEM ALB-ALB-ALB-ALB-ALB-ALB-ALB-2.3.4.5.6.1.2 Tile Labeling-6.3.3.5a(1) and a(2), and 6.3.5.5d(l) through d(6).a.Measure and record in Table 1.2a the character height(s)used in the tiles.If more than one size character is used, record the height for all of the repr esented heights.Also measure and record the farthest left and farthest right tile from its associated acknowledge station for each of the r epresented character heights (start at the left most acknowledge station and number the stations going clockwise around the MCB).
.0 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B1.1 MEASUREMENTS DATA TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.2 (Cont.)TABLE 1.2a STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 CHAR HT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT b.For each acknowledge station in the table above, measure and record in Table 1.2b the height from the floor for.the farthest left and farthest right tile from this same table.TABLE 1.2b TILE HEIGHT FROM FLOOR CHAR HT STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 81.1-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX Bl.l MEASUREMENTS DATA TP-3.1 1 May 1983 c.Measure and record the following for each of the different character heights from a, above: TABLE 1.2c HT (ref CHAR/NUM WIDTH STROKE WIDTH CHAR SPACING WORD SPACING LINE SPACING 1.3 Data Reduction and Analysis.For data reduction and analysis, obtain the appropriate analysis aids from Appendix B5 (ref.B5.1).81.1-3 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 81.2 MEASUREMENTS DATA TP-3.1 1 May 1983 2.SOUND MEASUREMENTS (AUDIBLE SIGNALS)2.1 Annunciator Audible Alarms-6.3.2.1a.Measure the sound level in dB(A)for each annunciator audible alarm at each of the following operator positions:
TABLE 2 MCB SAFETY SYSTEMS REAC TURB ELEC RAD MON OP LOCATION POS 1 POS 2 CONT GEN DIST CONSOLE DESK 2.3~4.5.2.2 Data Reduction and Analysis.For data reduction and analysis, obtain the appropriate analysis aids from Appendix 85 (ref.B5.2).B1.2-1
- e.
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX 81.3 MEASUREMENTS DATA 3.LIGHT MEASUREMENTS (TILE FLASH CHARACTERISTICS)
-6.3.5b(l)and 6.3.3.2b 3.1 Using the Flash Comparator, measure the flash rate of tiles in alarm and in cl ear.Record the rates.Alarm Flash Rate: Cleared Flash Rate: 3.2 Using the Flash Comparator, measure the on-off ratio for the alarm flash rate and cleared flash rate.On-Of f Ra ti o (Al arm): On-Off Ratio (Cleared):
Bl.3-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX 82 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE INSTRUCTIONS 1.The following are questions concerning the general layout, functional organization, and operational considerations in your control room.Most of the questions will require a YES or NO answer, with some additional information.
2.When you have comments or suggestions, use the space provided below each question.If you need additional room, use the backs of the sheets.3.If you do not understand a question, please ask the monitor for clarification.
4.Please answer all of the questions as completely as possible.~~Io~5.6.Take as much time as you need to complete the questionyaire.
All of your answers, and your biographical information, will be kept in the strictest confidence and will be used to, aid in the performance of the detailed control room design review.PLEASE BEGIN 82-1
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: Name: Age: Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position/Title:
1.Do you have a current reactor operator's license7 YES NO 2.Amount of licensed experience at this plant: 3.Total amount licensed experience:
4.Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.): 5.Education:
a.Highest level attained: b.Specialized Schools or courses (list): 6.Military experience:
B2-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX.82 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 1.Do you have a first out annunciator panel where only the tile assoc-iated with the reactor trip event illuminates and all subsequent alarms on that panel are"locked out"?YES NO 2.Do you know of any automatic reactor trip functions that do not have a separate annunciator tile on the first out panel (either missing or shared with other functions)'?
~YES NO 3.Are the annunciator panels in the control room identified by a label above each panel?YES NO 4.From your primary operating area, cari you read all annunciator panel labels with a minimum of effort?YES NO 5.Is the annunciator system priority coded by color, position, shape, or symbolic coding of the tiles?YES NO 6.Does your annunciator system use color coding'?YES NO 7.Are there more than eleven colors used for coding the panels?YES NO B2-3
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX 82 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 8.Is there a standard meaning attached to the colors used for coding the panels?YES NO 9.Is the color red ever used for a condition other than unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or as an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance?
YES NO 10.Is the color green ever used for a condition other than safe, no operator action required, or as an indication that a parameter is within tolerance' YES NO ll.Is the color amber (yellow)ever used for a condition other than hazard (potentially unsafe), caution, attention required, or as an indication that a marginal value or parameter exists?YES NO 12.Do you know of any unnecessary color coding on the annunciator panels?YES NO 13.Do you know of any colors that are not used consistently across all applications within the control room, from panel-to-panel or in si gnal 1 i g hts and on CRTs?YES NO 82-4
ANNuNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 14.Are auditory signals priority coded by pulse, frequency change (warbling), intensity, or different frequencies for different signals'ES NO 15.If you have separate alarm horns, can you easily identify the work station or system where the auditory signal originated7 YES NO 16.Do you have different alarm horns for work areas not at the main control boards YES NO 17.If the auditory alarm signal has only one source, is the sound coded to direct you to different work areas2 YES NO 18.Do any of the alarm horns startle or irritate you7 YES NO 19.If you have different alarm horns, do any of them sound too loud or too soft in comparison to the others at your normal work station7 YES NO 20.Do you have a silence control with each set of response controls in your primary operating area'?YES NO B2-5
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX.82 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 21.Is a control provided which terminates a flashing visual tile, but allows a steady illumination until the alarm"is cleared?YES NO 22.Can you acknowledge an alarm from more than one response control~~area?YES NO 23.If cleared alarms do not reset automatically, do you have a control to reset them your self'YES NO 24.Does the reset control silence the auditory signal as well as extin-guish the illumination?
YES NO 25.Does the reset control operate from more than one response control area?YES NO 26.Can you defeat any of the annunciator controls, such as locking out the audible alarm or locking down the acknowledge control?YES NO 27.Can you test the auditory and flashing illumination signals of all tils for each panel?YES NO B2-6
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX,B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 28.Is there an administrative procedure that controls the periodic testing of all annunciators'?
YES NO 29.Are all tiles dark on annunciator panels when no alarm is indicated'?
YES NO 30.Can you easily tell if a tile is normally on for an extended dura-tion during normal operating conditions' YES NO 31.Are you immediately aware if an annunciator tile is out of service?YES NO 32.Can you immediately determine when the flasher of an alarm tile fails?YES NO 33.Do you know of any alarms that occur so frequently that you consider them a nuisance?YES NO B2-7
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX.82 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 34.Do you know of any alarms that do not give you ample time to respond to a warning condition?
YES NO 35.When responding to an alarm tile, can you readily locate the controls and displays required for corrective or diagnostic action?YES NO 36.Do you have access to annunciator response procedures in the control room?YES NO 37.Do you know of any alarms which require you to obtain additional,infor-mation from a source outside of the control room area?YES NO 38.Are there too many alarms which require additional information from panels outside your operating area?YES NO 82-8 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX.82 OPERATOR I NTERV I EW/QU ESTI ONNAI RE 39.If alarms are used that require information outside the control room, do they allow you ample time to respond'YES NO 40.Are alarms provided for shared equipment in all control rooms?'I YES NO 41.Is there a status display or signal provided for shared equipment in all control rooms which indicates that the equipment is currently being operated?YES NO e 42.Do you have any tiles with dual messages such as HIGH-LOW?YES NO 43.Does the multi-input alarm have a ref lash capability that ref lashes the visual tile after an auditory alert even if the first alarm has not been cleared?YES NO 82-9 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Hay 1983 APPENDI X,B2 OPERATOR I NTERV I EW/QUESTIONNAIRE 44.Do multi-input annunciators provide you with an alarm printout'ES NO 45.Does the multi-input alarm typer have sufficient speed to print the alarm data fast enough for your needs'?YES NO 46.Does the alarm typer ever skip or loose information, or garble (mix up)the printing?YES NO B2-10
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST INSTRUCTIONS l.Using the attached checklist, make all the noted observations.
2.Record all necessary information in the comments column to justify an N/A check and to detail a NO check.3.Insure that all comments for NO checks include component, instrument, panel, equipment, etc.identification and location information.
4.Initiate HED reports on all NO checks per the directions contained in the checklist.
analysis aids.B3-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN APPENOIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS l.A separate first out panel should be provided for the reactor system-6D.1.3a(l).
2.A separate first out panel is recommended for the turbine-generator system that is func-tionally similar to th reactor system panel-6.3.1.3b.First out panels should be located above their main work stations-69.1.3c.4.All first out panels should conform to the general auditory and visual items in the rest of this checklist-6.3.1.3d.5.A small number (2-4)of levels of priority coding are used-6D.1.4a(l).
6.Priority coding of color, posi-tion, shape, or symbol is used for visual signals-6D.1.4b(l).
B3-2 0
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 7.Auditory signal priority coding may be used-6D.1.4b(2).
8.If more than one, each audi-tory signal should sound at approxi-mately equal loudness at normal work stations in the primary opera-ting area-6.3.2.1d., 9.An auditory signal should capture the operator's attention but should not irritate or cause a startled reaction-6.3.2.lc.10.Separate auditory signals at each work station within the pri-mary operating area are recom-mended-6D.2.1f.11.The operator should be able to identify the work station or area where the auditory alert origi-nated-6D.2.lf.12.The auditory signal should automatically reset when silenced-6.>.2.le.B3" 3
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 83 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 13.When an alarm clears (or is cleared)there should be a dedi-cated, distinct audible signal with a finite duration-6D.1.5a.14.Auditory alert signal(s), if adjustable, should be controlled by administrative procedure-6.3.2.lb.15.The specific title(s)in an ALB should visually flash to indicate an alarm condition-6D.3.2a.16.In case of flasher failure, an alarming tile should illuminate and burn steadily-6.3.3.2c.17.Contrast between tiles should present no problem discriminating between alarming, steady-on, and steady-off conditions
-6.38.2d.B3-4
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 83 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 18.Under normal (nonalarmed) conditions no annunciator tiles should be illuminated
-6.3.3.2e.19.If a tile must be on for an extended period during normal operations it should be distinc-tively coded for positive recog-nition during this period (see also 6 3.3.2f(2), item Zc on the Document Review Checklist)-
6.3.3.2f(1).
20.Cleared tiles should have either a special flash rate, a reduced brightness, or a special color-6.3.1.5b(1) through b(3).21.All tiles associated with a given acknowledge control should be readable when operating that control-6 3.3.5a.22.Character style on all tiles should be simple-6 3.3.5b(1).
23.Character style should be consistent on all tiles-6 3.3.5b(2).
83-5
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO CONMENTS 24.Character style should be uppercase on all tiles-6 3.3.5b(3).
25.Tile legends should have high contrast with the tile background-6 3.3.5c.26.Tile legends should be engraved-6.3.3.5c(l).
27.Tile legends should be dark and opaque on a light and trans-lucent background
-6.3.3.5c(2).
28.Tile legends should be specific, unambiguous, concise, and short-6.3.3.4a.29.Tile legends should address specific conditions, HIGH TEMP, or LOW PRESS, not HIGH-LOW TEMP-PRESS
-6.3.3.4c.B3-6 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 30.Abbreviations and acronyms in legends should be consistent with those in other labeling in the con-trol room-6 3.3.4d.31.Tiles should be organized as a matrix within each ALB-6 3.3.3a.32.The vertical and horizontal axes of the ALBs should be alpha-numerically labeled for tile desig-nation coordinates
-6.3.3.3c(1).
33.Coordinate designators are preferred at the left and top sides of the ALBs-6.3.3.3c (2).34.Character height for the coordinate labels should be the same height as those used in tile legends-6 3.3.3c(3).
35.The number of tiles in an ALB should be kept low, with a maxi-mum of 50 tiles per ALB suggested-6.3.3.3d(l).
B3-7
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 36.Cues for prompt recognition of an out-of-service annunciator should be designed into the system-6 3.3.3e.37.Blank or unused tiles should not be illuminated except during annunciator testing-6.3.3.3f.38.Demarcation lines may be used to enclose functionally related titles-6.6.6.2a(l).
39.Demarcation lines may be used to group tiles with their related controls and/or displays-6.6.6.2a(l) through a(3).40.If used, demarcation lines should be visually distinctive from the panel background
-6.6.6.2b.~\~41.If used, demarcation lines should be permanently attached-6.6.6.2c.B3-8 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 83 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 42.ALBs should be located above the controls and displays required for corrective or diagnostic action when they alarm-6.3.3.1a.43.Each ALB should be identified by a label directly above it-6.3.3.1b(1).
44.Each set of annunciator controls should include a silence control-6.3.4.la(1).
45.An acknowledge control should be provided that terminates the flashing and causes the tile to continuously illuminate until it has cleared-6.>.4.lb(l).
46.If an automatic cleared alarm feature is not provided, a control should be provided to reset the system after an alarm has cleared-6.3.4.1c(1).
83-9 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B3 OBSERVATIONS CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS 47.A control to test the auditory alarm and the flashing illumination of all tiles in a panel (i.e., in one or more ALBs)should be provided-6 3.4.1d(l).
48.Repetitive groups of annun-ciator controls should have the same arrangement and relative location at different work stations-6.3.4.2a.49.Annunciator controls should be coded differently than other panel controls either by color, demarca-tion, or shape-6.3.4.2b(l) through b(4).50.Shape coding is preferred for the silence control-6.3.4.2b(4).
51.Annunciator control designs should not allow the operator to defeat the control operation such as inserting a coin into a control guard ring-6.3.4.2c.52.Annunciator response proce-dures should be available in the control room-6.3.4.3a.83-.10 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B4 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST INSTRUCTIONS Collect the following documents and review them for the information contained in the attached checklist:
1.Administrative Procedures concerning annunciators 2.Annunciator Response Procedures 3.Results from the following task reports: a.Convention Survey b.System Function Task Analysis c.Labeling Survey 4.Insure that all comments for NO checks include component, instrument, panel, equipment, etc.identification and location information.
5.Initiate HED r eports on all NO checks per the directions contained in the checklist analysis aids.B4-1
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B4 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS l.ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURES a.Response procedures should be indexed by panel I.D.and tile coordinates
-6D.4Db b.There should be no alarms that require the operator to direct an auxiliary, operator outside the con-trol room to obtain more specific information
-6D.1.2b(l).
c.Annunciators with inputs from more than one plant parameter set point should be avoided (multi-input alarms that summarize single-input alarms elsewhere in the control room are an excep-tion)-68.1.2c(1) 2.PLANT ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES N a.Periodic testing of annunci-ators should be required and con-trolled by administrative pro-cedures-6.3.4.ld(2).
b.If audible alarm intensity is operator-adjustable, it should be.controlled by administrative procedures
-6D.2.1b.B4-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN APPENDIX 84 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS PLANT ADMIN PROCESS (cont)c.When annunciator tiles must be on for an extended period during normal operations, it should be controlled by administrative pro-cedures (see also 6.3D.2f(1), item 19 on the Observations Check-list)-69.3.2f(2).
3.CONVENTIONS TASK REPORT a.Color meanings should not be the only means for identifying pertinent information, that is, all color coding used should be redundant information
-6.5.1.6a.b.The number of colors used for coding should be kept to the mini-mum needed to provide sufficient information and should not exceed ll-6.5.1.6b(l) and b(2).c.Color meanings should be narrowly defined-6.5.1.6c(1).
d.Red should mean unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or an indication that a critical parameter is out of toler-ance-6.5.1.6c(2).
It is important to note that in one sense, a strict interpretation of 84-3
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEN APPENDIX B4 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO COMMENTS CONVENTIONS TR (Cont)this statement would mean that a standard, and broadly applied convention in the nuclear industry was incorrect.
However, keep in mind that flowing electricity (closed breakers), flowing water or steam (running pumps and open valves), and an active reactor can be considered inherently less safe than a shut off or shut down condition.
e.Green should mean safe, shut off, shut down, no operator action required, or an indication that a parameter is within tolerance-6.5.1.6c(2).
f.Amber or yellow should mean a hazard, potentially unsafe, caution, attention required, or an indication that a marginal value or parameter exists-6.5.1.6c(2).
g.Meanings assigned to a partic-ular color should be consistent across all control room appli-cations regardless of whether it is on a panel surface, in indicator lights or in CRTs-6.5.1.6d(l) and (2).h.Abbreviations and acronyms should be consistent across control room applications
-69.3.4d.B4-4
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B4 DOCUMENTATION REVIEW CHECKLIST TP-3.1 1 May 1983 N/A YES NO CONMENTS 4.SFTA TASK REPORT a.The annunciator warning sys-tem should be designed as the pri-mary alerting interface with the operator for out-of-tolerance con-ditions.It should consist of three major subsystems:
auditory alert, visual alarm, and operator response.These three subsystems should function to provide a pre-fered operational sequence for annunciator warnings-6.3.1.1.b.Visual alarm tiles should be grouped by function, system, sub-system, or other logical organi-zation within ALBs-6.3.3Db and d(2).c.Prioritization of annunciators should be based on a continum of importance, severity, or need for operator action in one or more dimensions such as, the likelihood of a reactor trip or the likelihood of a release of radiation-6.3.1.4a(2).
d.Tile legends should address specific conditions rather than a range of conditions and/or param-eters.As an example, separate tiles should be used to indicate temperature-low, temperature-high, pressure-low, and pressure-high, rather than a single tile with the legend HIGH-LOW TEMP-PRESS-6DD.4c.B4-5
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B5.1 MEASUREMENTS ANALYSIS 1.LINEAR MEASUREMENTS (LABELING) 1.1 ALB Summary Labels-6.3.3.l.b(2) a.If there are no summary labels, check N/A for criterion 6.3.3.l.b(2) in Appendix A.b.If there are summary labels, calculate the visual angels for each label for the operator positions listed in Table l.lb Table l.lb SAFETY SYSTEMS IDENT POS 1 POS 2 MCB REAC TURB ELEC RAD MON OP'S CONT GEN DIST CONSOLE DESK 2.3.4.5.6.7.Calculations (use extra sheets, as needed): 85.1-1
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B5.1 MEASUREMENTS ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 c.If all visual angles in Table 1.1b are 15 minutes of arc or greater, check YES for criterion 6.3.3.1b(2) in Appendix A.d.If there are visual angles in Table 1.1b less than 15 minues of arc, record on an BED report form the position(s) and label(s)where this is so.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.1.1 in data collection description.
For criterion 6.3.3.1b(2) in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED r eport number and the code number, TP-3.1B5.1.1 in the COMMENTS column 1.2 Tile Labels-6.3.3.5a(1) and d(1)through d(6).a.Calculate the visual angles for each character height at its farthest left and farthest right location for each workstation in Table 1.2a, below.TABLE 1.2a ALB NO/STA 1 STA 2 STA 3 STA 4 STA 5 CHAR HT LEFT RIGHT LEFT, RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT Ca'lculations (use extra sheets, as required):
85.1-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B5.1 MEASuREMENTS ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 b.If all visual angles in Table 1.2a are 15 minutes of arc or gr eater, check YES for criterion 6.3.3.5a(l) in Appendix A.c.If any visual angles in Table 1.2a are less than 15 minutes of arc,.record on an HED report form the position(s) and tile legend(s)where this is so.Include the code number TP-3.1B5,1.2 in the data collection description.
For criterion 6.3.3.5a(l)in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED report number and the code number, TP-3.1B5.1.2, in the COMMENTS column.d.Compare the character dimensions and legend measurements for each character height recorded with criteria 6.3.3.5d(1) through d(6).e.If all character heights and legends meet the criteria, check the YES column for these criteria in Appendix A.f.If any character dimensions or legend measurements fail to meet the criteria, record on an HED report form the tile coordinates, character height implicated, and a description of the failure.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.1.2 in the data collection description.
For criteria 6.3.3.5d(1) through d(6)in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED report number and the code number TP-3.1B5.1
~2, in the COMMENTS column.B 5.1-3
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B5.2 MEASUREMENTS ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 2.SOUND MEASUREMENTS (AUDIBLE SIGNALS)2.1 Annunciator Audible Alarms-6.3.2.1a.a.Obtain the average ambient noise level in db(A)from the Ambient Noise Survey Task Report (TR-1.6)and record below: Average noise level: db(A)b.Based upon the below adjustment factors, reduce each measur ed annunciator alarm level and record in Table 2.1b.ABSOLUTE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN MEASURED LEVEL (Lm)AND AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL Ln 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SUBTRACT THIS AMOUNT FROM MEASURED LEVEL (Lm)AND AND RECORD IN TABLE 2.1b 2.2 1.7 1.3 1.0.8.6.3.3.2..2-'.1 TABLE 2.1b MCB ALARM SAFETY SYSTEMS READ TURB ELEC RAD MON OP LOCATION POS 1 POS 2 CONT GEN DIST CONSOLE DESK 2.3.4.5.B5.2-1
,ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 85.2 MEASuREMENT ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 c.Compare all adjusted dB(A)levels in Table 2.1b to the average noise level.d.If all adjusted audible alarm levels are at least 10 dB(A)above the average noise level check the YES column for criterion 6.3.2.1a in Appendix A.e.If any adjusted alarm levels are less than 10 dB(A)above the average noise level, record each occurance on an HED report form.Include the code number TP3.1B5.2.1 in the data collection description.
For criterion 6.3.2.la in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED report number and the'code number, TP3.185.2.1 in the COMMENTS column.85.2-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 85.3 MEASUREMENT ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 3.LIGHT MEASUREMENTS (TILE FLASH CHARACTERISTICS)
3.1 Alarmed
Flash Characteristics
-6.3.3.2b.a.From the recorded data, determine if the alarmed flash rate is between 3 to 5 flashes per second and that the on-off ratio is approximately 1:l.b.If both parameters meet the criteria, check the YES column for criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A.c~If either parameter fails to meet the criteria, record the discrepancy on an HED report form.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.3.1 in the data collection description.
For criterion 6.3.3.2b in Appendix A check the NO column and record the HED number and the code number,, TP-3.1B5.3.1, in the COMMENTS column.3.2 Cleared Flash Rate-6.3.1.5b(1).
a.From the recorded data, determine if the cleared flash rate is approximately double or 3;the alarmed flash rate.b.If the cleared flash rate passes the criterion, check the YES column for criteria 6.3.1.5b(l) in Appendix A.C.'f the cleared flash rate fails to meet the criterion, record the discrepancy on an HED report form.Include the code number TP-3.1B5.3.2 in the data collection discription;., For criterion 6.3.1.5b(1) in Appendix A, check the NO column and record the HED number and the code number, TP-3.1B5.3.2, in the COMMENTS column.B5.3-1 0
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B6 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 1.GENERAL a.Review all questionnaires for completeness of biographical information and question responses.
b.Delete incomplete and unusable questionnaires from the data base.If required by contract, re-schedule these question-naires for correction/completeness.
c.When the data base assembly is complete perform the anaylsis, below.2.BIOGRAPHICAL DATA a.Assemble biographical data and determine ranges and distribu-tions for all relevant dimensions.
b.Using appropriate statistics, determine the distribution (or its approximation) for this data.3.RESPONSE DATA a.Summarize all responses and determine percent frequency response for each negative answer.b.For each negative answer, initiate Preliminary HEDs'(PHEDs) for discrepancy review.Record frequency data, response question number and data collection code number on each PHED.Code numbers are developed as follows: (See List 3b for criteria}Exampl e: Task Plan Number Appendix TP-3.1B6.10 question Number c.Submit all PHEDs to your immediate supervisor.
d.Subsequent verification, validation and disposition of all PHEDs will be conducted per TP-10.1 (HED Review Procedure).
86-1 0
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 86'PERATOR INTERVI EW/QUESTIONNAIRE ANALYSIS TP>>3.1 1 May 1983 l.2.3.5.6.3.1.3a(3) 6.3.1.3a(2) 6.3.3.1b 1)6.3.3.1b(2) 6.3.1.4b(1)
LIST 3b 20.6.3.4.la(l)5(2) 21.6.3.4.1b(1) 22.6.3.4.1b(2) 23.6.3.4.1c(l) 24.6.3.4.1c(2) 40.6.3.1.2d(1) 41'.3.1.2d(2) 42.6.3.3.4c 43.6.3.1.2c(3) 44.6.3.1.2c(2) 6.6.5.1.6b(1) 7.6.5.1.6b(2) 8.6.5.1.6c(1) 9.6.5.1.6c(2) 10.6.5.1.6c(2) 25.26.27.28.29.6.3.4.1c(3) 6.3.4.2c 6.3.4.1d(1) 6.3.4.ld(2) 6.3.3.2e 45.6.3.1.2c(2) 46.6.3.1.2c(2) ll.6.5.1.6c(2) 12.6.5.1.6b(1) 13.6.5.1.6d(1)8(2) 14.6.3.1.4b(2)8 6.3.2.2b 30.6.3.3.2f 31.6.3.3.3e 32.6.3.3.2c 33.6.3.1.2a(l) 34.6.3.1.2a(2) 15.6.3.2.lf 16.6.3.2.2a(1) 17.6.3.2.2a(2) 18.6.3.2.lc 19.6.3.2.ld 35.36.37.38.39.6.3.3.1a 6.3.4.3a 6.3.1.2b(1) 6.3.3,4b 6.3.1.2b(2) 86-2 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 87 OBSERVATION CHECKLIST ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.For each checklist item checked NO, initiate an HED report.Enter the HED report number in the COMMENTS column of the checklist for that item.Include all necessary information on the HED report concerning identification of the discrepancy and the criteria (checklist item)not met.2.Enter the following code number in the data collection description:
T P-3.183.n Checklist Item Number 3.find the appropriate criterion or criteria in Appendix A from the reference number in the checklist item.Check the NO column and enter the HED number and the data collection code number in the COMMENTS column for that criterion or criteria.B7-1 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX 88 DOCUMENTATION REVIEM CHECKLIST ANALYSIS TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.For each checklist item checked NO, initiate an HED report.Enter the HED report number in the COMMENTS column of the checklist for that item.Include all necessary information on the HED report concerning identification of the discrepancy and the criteria (checklist item)not met.2.Enter the following code number in the data collection description:
T P-3.18 4.n Checklist Item Number 3.Find the appropriate criterion or criteria in Appendix A from the reference number in the checklist item.Check the NO column and enter the HED number and the data collection code number in the COMMENTS column for that criterion or criteria.88-1 APPENDIX B9 HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY (HED)REPORT ORIGINATOR:
VALIDATED BT: PLANT/UH IT HED NO.: DATE: a)HEO TITLE: b)ITENS INVOLVED: c)PROBLEH DESCRIPTION:
d)DATA COLLECTION DESCRIPTION CODE NUNBER: e)SPECIFIC KUNN ERROR(S): B9-I APPENDIX B9 HED REPORT (CONTINUED)
PLlHT/UNIT HED HO.: f)SUGGESTED BACKFIT: g)REVIEW AND DISPOSITION:
B9-2
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Hay 1983 APPENDIX C CR ITERIA MATRIX ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 CRITERIA MATRIX Criteria Distributed Across Data Collection Methods.Notes: 1.The fo'tlowing codes apply to the matrix columns: M-Measurement (instruments and/or measuring devices required)0-Observations (observation notes taken)I-Interview/guestionnaire (generally a structured interview unless otherwise specified)
D-Document Review (documentation review to include engineering drawings, CWDs, etc.)A-Auditory Criteria V-Visual Criteria C-Controls Criteria (physical characteristics)
P-Physical Arrangement/Location Criteria F-Functional Criteria (usually requires some operational data for verification) 2.Data sources listed are suggested.
Alternatives should be used when those listed are not available or are not adequate.
0 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 CRITERIA MATRIX"0 CRITERIA NUREG--0700 ara number 6.3.1.1 6.3.1.2a(1)
'a(2)b(1)b 2)c I)*c(2)c 3)d 1)d(2)6.3.1.3a(l)
'a(2)a(3)b c d 6.3.1.4a(l) a(2)b(1)b(2)6.3.1.5a b 1)b 2)b(3)6.3.2.1a 6.3.2.2a(1) a(2)b~~~~~6.3.3.1a b(1)b(2)c(l)c(2)c(3)PF PF PF PF PF PF PF PF F F F P P P P P P DATA COLLECTION METHODS M 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X N/A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X N/A N/A N/A SUGGESTED DATA SOURCES SFTA Rpt Ops Ops Ops, Ann Resp Procs Ops Ann Resp Procs Ops Ops Ops Ops Pnl Ops Ops Pnl Pnl All Pnl Pnl, SFTA'pt Pnl Pnl Pnl Pnl Pnl Pnl CR CR, Admin Procs CR, Ops CR, Ops CR CR, Ops Ops Ops Ops Pnl Pnl CR REMARKS also in TP-9.1 (SFTA)see text para.4.2a also in TP-9.1 (SFTA)in TP-l.8 (Maint)in TP-1.8 (Maint)in TP-l.8 (Maint)C-2 a 0" ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX D TAS K P LAN CR I T I QU E ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM TP-3.1 1 Nay 1983 APPENDIX 0 TASK PLAN CRITIQUE INSTRUCTIONS 1.Attach a copy of Section 4.0.2.Fill in the required information and answer all questions.
3.Explain all NO answers in detail.4.When complete, turn in to your immediate supervisor.
1.Name of Respondent:
2.Name of Plant:.3.Date of Survey: 4.Were all of the criteria correct and appropriate for this task (do not explain criteria that were N/A because System/CR dig..not have that design feature)2 YES NO 5.Did the task plan instructions present the easiest and best methodology for performing the assessment?
YES NO 6.Mere the data collection forms adequate2 YES NO I 11 D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW PROGRAM PLAN FOR VERIFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE CAPABILITIES
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of Verification of Task Performance Capabilities is to assure that operator tasks can be performed within the existing'ontrol room with minimum potential for human error.Verification evaluates,the availability and suitability of the control room instrumentation and controls to support the performance of operator actions.1.2 Scope The sc'ope of the Verification Task effort is to assure the availability and suitability of those controls and instrumentation identified in the element tables for the emergency operating procedures selected for task analysis.The remaining main control board devices will then be compared against NUREG-0700, Section 6 Guidelines that pertain to verification of task performance capabilities.
2.0 VERIFICATION
METHOD The D.C.Cook Control Rooms will be ver.ified by an observation/comparison method using the control room"mockup", the control rooms inventory and the task analysis documents developed in the System Function Review and Task Analysis (SRTA).The Verification of Task Performance Capabilities will be accomplished in two parts: Verification of Availability and Verification of Suitability.
2.1 Verification
of Availability The control/indication requirements table and the instrumentation
.requirements table will be compared with the control board mockup and the control room inventory to verify the availability of the required equipment.
Any missing equipment'shall be recorded on a Checklist Observations Report form.Equipment not identified on the requirements tables shall be listed and verified with the D.C.Cook operating personnel as to use and need.If a use or need is not identified, this equipment shall be listed.on a CLO form,
2.2 Verification
of Suitability The verification of suitability will be accomplished by comparing the actions required and equipment characteristics requirements of the control/indication requirements table and the instrumentation requirements table with the control room inventory and the control board mockup.Components that do not meet the requirements of the above tables will be listed on a CLO form.3.0 DOCUMENTATION The documentation used or generated during the verification task will be, maintained as a part of the DCRDR data file.This documentation will consist of the following:
1.Control/indication requirements table-Verification
-Checklist 2.Instrumentation requirements table-Verification Checklist 3.Control Board Inventory'.
Checklist Observation Reports 0
D.C.COOK CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW PROGRAM PLAN FOR VALIDATION OF CONTROL ROOM FUNCTIONS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this program is to define the process to be used for validation of control room functions.
This document describes the preparation>
implementation and documentation phases of the validation program and assigns responsibilities for execution of the validation program.1.2 Scope Val idation is the process of determining whether the control room operating crew can perform their tasks effectively given the control room design (instrumentation and controls)i the procedures and their training.These four considerations (oper atorsi control room>procedures and training)are frequently referred to as the components of the Emergency Response Capability systems and the validation performed to evaluate their overall performance is termed a SYSTEM validation.
The scope of this program plan includes definition of the SYSTEM validation necessary to exercise the ERC systems but is limited to the evaluation of the control room component of the ERC system.
The=Detailed Control Room Design Review Program for the D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant is the responsibility of the Indiana and Michigan El ectric Company.Westinghouse Electric Corporation has been contracted to assist in the performance of the DCRDR.This contract includes prime responsibil ity for the performance of the validation phase of the DCRDR program.2.1 Westinghouse Electric Corpor ation Westinghouse wi1 1 conduct al 1 phases of the DCRDR val i dation program.2.2 Indiana and Michigan Electric Company I8M wil 1 provide at least one team of Control Room operators to perform the walk-through/talk-through phase of the Validation program.
3.0 PR P TION PHA E This phase is necessary to identify the resources needed in a CRDR validation.
Proper test methods with accompanying test scenarios must be selected and devel oped so that the control room is properly exercised during the testing phase.The operating crew must be trained in the proper use of the D.C.Cook Emergency Operating Procedures so that.the validation scenarios are implemented as planned.The val idation scenarios have been developed based on the correct use of the EOP's.Any deviations from proper EOP usage may hamper both the progress of the scenario and the accurate assessment of the control room.3.1 Validation Method The D.C.Cook control room will be vali'dated using a walk-.through/talk-through method at the Unit I full scale"mock up".The operating crew wil 1 walk-through each of the validation scenarios to identify and locate controls and displays used to perform each step of the scenarios.
At the completion of each walk-through' talk-through (debriefing) will be performed to resolve observation team questions or comments and to evaluate control and displ ay avail abil ities and readabil ities.In addition>human factors suitabil ities wil 1 be evaluated.
Each of the walk-through/talk-through sessions will be taped (video and audio)as part of the control room validation documentation.
3.2 Validation
Evaluation Criteria Evaluation criteria are needed to control and direct the talk-through sessions.The evaluation criteria listed on Attachment I will be used by the observation team leader to guide the talk-throughs.
3.3 Validation
Scenarios A scenario$s the written descr$pt$on of a plant transient(s) and/or equipment faflure<s) used to exercise the ERC System.It provides the backgrounds prerequisite cond)talons>
and the proper sequence of realistic plant symptoms and responses.
The scenario should guide.the system through a des)gnated evaluation path so evaluation criteria can be addressed.
Scenarios wi 1 1 vary$n length, complexity and style.
The validation scenarios 1 isted below have been selected for the validation phase of the DCRDR.Sc A<<l Reactor Trip A-2 Anticipated Transient Without Scram (ATWS)f rom fu1 1 power fol lowing loss of off site power A-3 Loss of all feedwater A-4 Secondary Break Outside Containment Steam Generator Tube Rupture in Different Steam Generators.
Plus Cooldown A-6 Design Base Accident Loss of Coolant Accident (DBA LOCA)with Switchover A-7 Intermediate LOCA-Post LOCA Cooldown A-8 Steam Generator Tube Leak Plus Spurious Safety Infection (SI)A-9 Inadequate Core Cooling A-10 Secondary Break-All S/G Stop Valves Fail to Close 0
3.4 Validation
Data Collection Data collection will originate from the following sources: l.Video and audio recordings of each scenario.2.Observation team inputs during talk-through sessions.3.Operating team inputs o During walk-throughs o During talk-throughs Problems identified during the talk-through sessions will be recorded on a'talk-through problem report form shown on Attachment 2.Validation data will be collected for later review by the observation team to identify Checklist Observation Reports.6
3.5 Operating
Crew Responsib il 1 t1es The operat1ng crew is responsible for performing the walk-through in accordance with the scenarios and procedures identified and to respond to questions posed by the observation team during the talk-throughs.
The operating crew is also responsible for identifying known Control Room defic1ency not identified during the walk-through session.3.6 Observat1on Team Responsibilities The Observation team is responsible for noting any deviations (real~suspectedi negative or positive)from the expected performance observed during the walk-throughs~
and to discuss such deviation with the operators during the talk-throughs to identify Control Room problems.It is also the responsibility of the Observation team to complete the talk-through problem report sheets for each of the identified problems.
4.0 IMP EMENTATI N Implementation phase wil 1 be accompl ished by applying the walk-through/talk-through process to the validation scenarios identified earlier.Before starting the Implementation phase>the operating crew and Observation team will be briefed on the method and objectives of the validation process and on their responsibilities as Control Room validation team members.To insure that al 1 participants understand both the scenarios and the walk-through process a short practice walk-through wi 1 1 be performed.
This practice walk-through will not be taped.At the start of each walk-through the operating crew wi1 1 be advised of the initial plant conditions.
The walk-through will then proceed through the applicable scenario.The operating crew will walk to the various work stations and identify~the appropriate controls and and displays used to accomplish each procedure step.Plant parameters required by the procedure step will be supplied by an Observation team member.During the walk-through Observation team members will note all deviations for later discussion during the talk-through session.The talk-through session wil 1 be conducted by viewing the playback of the tape of the walk-through.
The playback wil 1 be stopped at any deviation point or where a specific question is posed.The deviation or question wil 1 be resol ved.Those resolutions which identify a problem will be documented on a talk-through problem report form.
In additioni Checklist observations from the DCRDR Verification Task will be introduced and verified.The Validation Evaluation Criteria questions wil 1 introduce additional discussions and identification of Control Room problems to be resolved and documented.
5.0 D UE IO Documentation generated during the Validation phase will be collected and maintain as part of the DCRDR documentation.
This documentation will consist of the following:
1.Walk-through video tapes 2.Talk-through video tapes 3.Talk-through Problems Reports Following completion of the Validation program the documentation will be analysis to provide the Checklist Observation Reports for the DCRDR program.
D.C.COOK UNITS 1 AND 2 CRDR VALIDATION PROGRAM VALIDATION EVALUATION CRITERIA 1.Are/were particular annunciators or instruments that the operator uses as cues adequate to make him realize that a step within a task should be expected.2.Are/were annunciators redundant2 Does more than one alarm tell him the same information2 3.Are/were controls reachable and displays readable for the appropriate system panel2 4.Are/were the identification labels of instrumentation and controls sufficiently detailed to permit the operator to locate the panel and the particular control without resorting to other documentation2 5.Do/did indications exist to allow the operator to determine that a step has been completed or that a condition has cleared2 Does this indication convey the information satisfactorily2 6.If the primary cues.controls>or indicators are not avail able>is there still some way to complete a given step2 7.If it is necessary for the operator to take some action when a parameter reaches a particular valuei is the instrument for that parameter accurate and readable to that value2 8.Are/were al 1 instrument scales and ranges appropriate to the required reading precision2 ATTACHMENT 1
A K-THROUGH PROBLEM TASK ID NO.PROCEOURE STEP TASK OPERATOR LOCATION EQUIPMENT T h'PROB!N()~
APPENDIX B DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 NRC STAFF COMMENTS ON THE PROGRAM PLAN
ih.~3 Cy n Docket Nos.50-315 and 50-316 UNITED STATES NUCLEAR R EGULATOR Y COMMISSION WASHINGTON, O.C.20555 Mr.John Dolan, Vice President Indiana and Michigan Electric Company c/o American Electric Power Service Corporation 1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43216
Dear Mr.Dolan:
In accordance with the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737, Indiana and Michigan Electric Company (IMECo)submitted a Program Plan for conducting a Detailed Control Room Design Review (DCROR)of the Donald C.Cook Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and 2, control rooms.The submittal has been reviewed with reference to the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 and the guidance contained in NUREG-0700 and draft NUREG-0801.
The staff was assisted in its review by consultants from Science Applications, Inc.(SAI).The OCRDR Program Plan submitted by IMECo demonstrates a commitment to meet the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
Additional information, however, is needed by the staff in a number of areas before a decision regarding the efficacy of the proposed OCROR can be made.In particular, further detailed discussion of procedures and methodologies for the Function and Task Analysis is necessary to provide assurance that this activity will yield sufficient usable data.It is requested that a meeting be held during April or May of this year to discuss the enclosed staff comments.A suggested agenda is included for IMECo consideration.
Please let us know within 2 weeks of receipt of this letter when a meeting would be suitable and if the agenda should be modified.The reporting and/or recordkeeping requirements of this letter affect fewer than ten respondents; therefore, OMB clearance is not required under P.L.96-511.
Enclosure:
As stated even A.Varga, h f Operating Reacto~Branch No.1 Division of Licensing cc w/enclosure:
See attached list
(Indiana and Michigan Electric Company': ",,;.'Donald C.Cook Nuclear.Plant, Units.1 and 2 CC: Mr.M.P.Alexich Vice President Nuclear Engineering American Electric Power Service Corporation 1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43215 Mr.William R.Rustem (2)Office of the Governor Room 1-Capitol Building Lansing, Michigan 48913 Mr.Wade Schuler, Supervisor Lake Township Baroda, Michigan 49101 W.G.Smith, Jr., Plant Manager Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant Post Office Box 458 Bridgman, Michigan 49106 U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission Resident Inspectors Office 7700 Red Arrow Highway Stevensvi lie, Michigan 49127 Gerald Charnoff, Esquire Shaw, Pittman, Potts and Trowbridge 1800 M Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20036 Honorable Jim Catania, Mayor City of Bridgman, Michigan 49106 U.S.Environmental Protection Agency Region V Office ATTN: E IS COORDINATOR 230 South
Dearborn Street Chicago,
IL 60604 Maurice S.Reizen, M.D.Director Department of Public Health Post Office Box 30035 Lansing, Michigan 48109 The Honorabl e Tom Corcot an United States House of Representatives Washington, DC 20515 James G.Keppl er Regional Administrator
-Region III U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission 799 Roosevelt Road.Glen.El lyn, IL 60137 J..Feinstein American Electric Power Service 1 Riverside Plaza Columbus, Ohio 43216
NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION STAFF COMMENTS ON THE DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR POWER PLANT, UNITS 1 AND 2 DETAILED CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW PROGRAM PLAN BACKGROUND Licensees and applicants for operating licenses shall conduct a Detailed Control Room Design Review (DCRDR).The objective is to"improve the ability of nuclear power plant control room operators to prevent accidents or cope with accidents if they occur by improving the information provided to them" (NUREG-0660, Item I.D).The need to conduct a DCRDR was confirmed in NUREG-0737 and Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
DCRDR requirements in Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 replaced those in earlier documents.
Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 requires each applicant or licensee to conduct a DCRDR on a schedule negotiated with the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC).NUREG-0700 describes four phases of the DCRDR and provides applicants and licensees with guidelines for its conduct..The phases are: 1.Planning 2.Review 3.Assessment and Implementation 4.Reporting.
Criteria for evaluating each phase are contained in draft NUREG-0801.
A Program Plan is to be submitted within two months of the start of the=-DCRDR.Consistent with the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737, the Program Plan shall describe how the following elements of the DCRDR will be accomplished:
l.Establishment of a qualified multidisciplinary review team 2.Function and task analyses to identify control room operator tasks and information and control requirements during emergency operations 3.A comparison of display and control requirements with a control room inventory 4.A control room survey to identify deviations from accepted human factors principles 5.Assessment of human engineering discrepancies (HEDs)to determine'hich HEDs are significant and should be corrected 6.Selection of design improvements 7.Verification that selected design improvements will provide the necessary correction 8.Verification that improvements will not introduce new HEDs 9.Coordination of control room improvements with changes from other programs such as SPDS, operator training, Reg.Guide 1.97 instrumentation, and upgraded emergency.
operating procedures.
A Summary Report is'to be submitted at the end of the DCRDR.As a minimum it shall: 1.Outline proposed control C)om.changes 2.3.Outline proposed schedules for implementation Provide summary justification for HEDs with safety significance to be left uncorrected or partially corrected.
The NRC will evaluate the organization, process, and results of the DCRDR.Evaluation will include review of required documentation (Program Plan and Summary Report)and may also include reviews of additional documentation, briefings, discussions, and on-site audits.In-progress audits may be conducted after submission of the Program Plan but prior to submission of the Summary Report.Preimplementation audits may be conducted after submission of the Summary Report.Evaluation will be in accordance with the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
Additional guidance for the evaluation is provided by NUREG-0700 and draft NUREG-0801.
Results of the NRC evaluation of a DCRDR will be documented in a Safety Evaluation Report (SER)or SER Supplement.
Significant HEDs should be corrected.
Improvements which can be accomplished with an enhancement program should be done promptly.Other control room upgrades may begin following publication of the SER (or SER Supplement), and staff approval of an implementation schedule for the design improvements.
DISCUSSION The Indiana and Michigan Electirc Company (IMECo)submitted a Program Plan for conducting a Detailed Control Room Design Review (OCRDR)of the Donald C.Cook Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and 2 control rooms, by letter dated December 29, 1983.That Program Plan has been reviewed against the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
Consultants from Science Applications, Inc.(SAI)assisted the staff in this review.NRC approval of Program Plans is not required and, as a result, the licensee has initiated work on the DCRDR.A Summary Report is expected in December 1985.The results of the staff review of the IMECo Program Plan are provided below.General Comments The OCRDR Program Plan submitted by IHECo demonstrates a commitment to meet the requirements of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
Additional information however, is needed by the staff in a number of areas before a decision regarding the efficacy of the proposed DCRDR can be made.In particular, detailed discussion of procedures and methodologies for the Function and Task Analysis is necessary to provide assurance that this activity will yield sufficient usable data.The staff suggests that a meeting be held with the licensee to obtain the needed information.
This may obviate the need of conducting an in-progress audit later on.A human factors evaluation of the design of the remote shutdown capability provided to meet 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A GDC-19, and 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix R is not specifically identified as a requirement in Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737.
Staff review of this issue is not complete.In the interim, we recommend that the scope of the DCRDR include a human factors evaluation of the design of the remote shutdown capability.
To the extent practicable, without delaying completion of the DCRDR, it should also address any control room modifications and additions (such as controls and displays for inadequate core cooling and reactor system vents)made or planned as a result of other post-TMI actions, and the lessons learned from operating reactor events such as the Salem ATWS events.Generic implications of the Salem ATWS events are discussed in NUREG-1000 and required actions are described in Section 1.2,"Post-Trip Review-Data and Information Capability," of the enclosure to Generic Letter 83-28.ualifications and Structure of the DCRDR Team The licensee.has proposed a multidisciplinary team for the OCROR.The team will consist of three subteams, including personnel from IMECo, American Electric Power Service Corporation (AEPSC), Westinghouse, and the Canyon Research Group (human factors contractor).
A"DCRDR Program Lead Engineer" will serve as the primary contact and will provide liaison between management and the Project Review and Assessment Teams.'he manner in which these teams will interface is shown in Figures 2-2 through 2-6 of the Program Plan (Ref.1).
Figure 2-1 (Ref.1)shows the OCRDR program organizational struct'ure.
The OCROR Program Lead Engineer appears in this structure as a member of all three subteams.The same is true of the individual designated as the"DCROR Program Administrator." The function of this position has not been clearly defined.The rest of the personnel consists of eight mechanical engineers, five electrical engineers, one marine engineer, one industrial engineer, one human factors engineer, and one systems management engineer.The disciplines listed are based on the educational backgrounds shown in individual resumes, however, they do not exactly agree with the titles shown on Figure 2-1.Further review of the resumes indicates that a number of these persons had become specialists in areas beyond those indicated by their educational backgrounds and that expertise in the following fields will also be represented:
nuclear safety, risk analysis, reliability and maintainability, and human factors.Section 2-3 of the Program Plan provides a listing of the functions of management but it is not clear which persons comprise"management." In Figures 2-2 through 2-5 there is an activity identified as"Supervisory Review/Comments." Again, it is not clear which persons comprise the"supervisory" function.Sections 2-4, 2-5 and 2-6 of the Program Plan present a listing of the functions of the Project Review Team, the Design Review Team, and the Assessment Team, respectively.
Figug e 2-1 presents the titles and names of each team's members but it is not clear which person, or persons, will be performing which functions (as suggested in draft NUREG-0801, Para.2.1.1);likewise, there is no indication of the individual levels of effort for each person listed in Figure 2-1.It is not clear to the staff, based upon the information.provided in the Program Plan, that the human factors professional will have full-time involvement throughout the DCRDR.In the interest of consistency and continuity, the staff suggests that the human factors specialist be the same on all three teams even though the Program Plan states that one of the functions of the Design Review Team is to assist the Assessment Team in its activities.
In summary, while the staff finds that the licensee is planning to provide a qualified, multidisciplinary DCROR review team and that plans for intra-DCRDR coordination and for cooperation with other planned and ongoing human factors programs will be implemented, more in-depth information regarding staffing, individual levels of effort, and individuals'esponsibilities should be discussed in a meeting with the licensee.Function and Task Anal sis Paragraph 5.l.bii of Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 states: "The licensee shall employ...function and task analysis (that had been used as a basis for, developing emergency operating procedures Technical Guidelines and plant specific emergency operator procedures) to identify control room operator tasks and information and control requirements during emergency operations." Subsection 5-5 of the Program Plan contains a very brief description of'the system function and task analysis.The licensee states that: "The System Function and Task Analysis will establish instrumentation requirements and performance criteria for select normal and emergency conditions.
This task will be performed by using plant-specific procedures generated from the Westinghouse 0wner s'roup Emergency Response Guidelines.
These plant-specific procedures will be submitted to the Design Review Team.These data will provide input to the Design Review Team for the verification and validation of control room functions (Tasks 5'and 6)." The staff'finds that this descript'ion, in addition to its brevity, ignores the guidelines of NUREG-0700, paragraphs:
3.4 and 3.4.2.1 through 3.4.2.4.The licensee has not provided enough information regarding what their system function and task analysis effort will involve for the staff to make any evaluation as to whether or not the requirement for function and task analysis will be satisfied.
The staff suggests that the licensee describe in the proposed meeting the processes/methodologies to be used by the licensee to identify control room operator tasks and information and control requirements during emergency operations.
Control Room Inventor The licensee's description of the DGRDR activity indicates their commitment to conduct a thorough and complete i'nventory of their control rooms, per the guidance contained in NUREG-0700.
This indication of coarnitment should be i: reinforced by providing more, detail.regardingstaffing and how the inventory will be conducted, e.g.,document'ation,',.'use'.of engineering drawings, use of equipment lists, use of photography and combinations thereof.Discussion of these issues in the proposed meeting would give the staff a better understanding of the inventory process and its purpose, i.e., to ensure that the information requirements identified in the function and task analysis are implemented and that displays and controls satisfying the information and control requirements are indeed available in the control room and adequate for the job.Control Room Surve The licensee's description of the conduct of their Control Room Survey indicates it will be performed in close compliance with the guidance of NUREG-0700 (as indicated in Appendix C of the Program Plan).There are, however, two additional areas that should have been, included in their survey plan: (1)Control/display integration
'and (2)'Panel lay'out.'f these two'reas are included, the licensee's Control Room Survey should prove successful for identifying HEDs.Subsection 4-3 of the Program Plan describes the development of a:Control'oom Human Engineering Criteria Repor t (CRHEC).which will be based on the guidelines provided in NUREG-0700, but reconstructed to be plant specific.
However, based on the information provided, it is not clear to the staff what is being planned or what the CRHEC report will contain.The idea of a review criteria document is good, but its inherent validity can not be assessed based upon the information contained in the Program Plan.This issue should be discussed in the proposed meeting.Assessment of Human En ineerin Discre ancies (HEDs The licensee's assessment of HEDs is based primarily on evaluation of CRHEC report deviations.
Since this report has not been adequately described, it is difficult for the staff to evaluate this activity.If the CRHEC report conforms closely to NUREG-0700 guidelines and is adequately described, the HED assessment process would appear to be satisfactory, except for the following problems: The licensee indicates in Subsection 6-2 of the Program Plan that the Assessment Team will evaluate and categorize each HED according to the methodology presented in Figure 6-2.The referenced figure is missing, therefore, the staff cannot comment on the l.icensee's methodology.
The fourth paragraph on Page 6-2 of the Program Plan gives the staff the impression that only Category IV HEDs will be assessed as to their possible cumulative and interactive effects on other HEDs.The last sentence in this paragraph sta+s: "Those Category-'V HEDs shown to possess the above effects will be recategorized to the appropriate Category II level." Reference to Figure 6-3 of the Program Plan shows only one Category II so the word"appropriate" should be deleted or its significance explained.
Further, the arbitrary assignment of such a HED to Category II requires explanation.
It seems possible to the staff (in the absence of HED assessment criteria)that such a HED might fall within category I or III.The above problems should be discussed in the proposed meeting.Selection of Desi n Im rovements While this OCRDR activity is not directly addressed by IMECo in the Program Plan, the licensee's description of HED assessment does indicate some considerations (in addition to the HED assessment) that will be given to design improvement selection.
The staff observes that during the course of the DCRDR and through implementation (Phase III-B)there will be a very large volume of paperwork generated.
However, the Program Plan does not describe any system for the orderly handling and maintenance of the HED-related documentation, i.e., no evidence of an HED tracking system (from the point of HED identification through HED assessment and implementation of HED resolutions) has been presented by the licensee. The staff finds that the licensee's Implementation Plan for HED resolution conforms to the guidance contained in draft NUREG-0801.
Verification That Im rovements Will Provide the Necessar Correction This requirement is not addressed by the licensee, therefore, the staff cannot comment as to whether or not the requirement will be satisfied by the licensee.If this verification process is part of the HED assessment process, the licensee should so state and the methodology clearly explained during the proposed meeting.Verification That Control Room Modifications Do Not Introduce New HEDs Brief mention of this requirement is made by the licensee, but the information provided in the Program Plan is too sparse for staff evaluation.
This requirement should be discussed in the proposed meeting.Coordination of the DCRDR With Other Pro rams On Page 1-6 of the Program Plan, in the description of Phase III-B activities, the licensee states that: "...a schedule wi 11 be developed to ensure the integration of the proposed control room changes with other post-TMI programs..." On Page 6-1 of the Program Plan, one of the stated objectives of the Assessment Phase qf the DCRDR Program is to: "Apply.the assessment process to other projects.related to the control room which are concerned with, or may be affected by, the human factors review (Regulatory Guide 1.97, Revision 2, Safety Parameter Display System, Procedures, and Training)." On Page 7-1 of the Program Plan, one of the considerations in the development of the HED resolution implementation schedule will be: " Integration With Other Post-TMI Programs." Section 9 of the Program Plan discusses coordination with other activities.
While the above indicates the licensee's awareness of the requirement for coordination between the DCRDR and other control room improvement programs, no plan/method showing how the coordination and integration of these efforts will be achieved is presented by the licensee.This, and the fact that Figure 9-1 of the Program Plan shows only a paralleling of activities but no connection b'etween'rograms, leaves some doubt as to the licensee's understanding of the objectives and advantages of program coordination.
This requirement should be discussed in the proposed meeting.CONCLUSION The DCRDR Program Plan submitted by IMECo for the Donald C.Cook Nuclear Power Plant, Units I and 2 demonstrates a commitment to meet the requirements of Supplement I to NUREG-0737.
Additional information, however, is needed by the staff in a number of areas before a decision regarding the efficacy of the proposed DCRDR can be made.Further detailed discussion of procedures and methodologies for the Function and Task Analysis is necessary to provide assurance that this activity will yield sufficient usable data.The Function and Task Analysis effort is particularly important because data from this activity are used as input data for many other review activities.
Likewise, the identification and categorization of HEDs is an important task as the success of the control room improvement program depends on this task's output.While the licensee is committed to implementing the requirements of NUREG-0737, Supplement 1, some of the requirements were not addressed or were so briefly addressed, that it is not clear to the staff that they were understood by the licensee.The staff, therefore, recommends that a meeting be held at NRC with IMECo representatives to afford the licensee an opportunity to provide further detailed information.
A suggested meeting agenda is provided which details the areas the staff believes need further clarification.
SUGGESTED AGENDA o gualifications and Structure of the DCRDR Review Team Specific task assignments and levels of effort full-time involvement of human factors specialist o Function and Task Analysis Contents of the CRHEC report Scope of the FATA Methodology for conduct of the FATA o Assessment of HEDs Criteria for categorization of HEDs o Selection of Design Improvements Methodology System for tracking HEDs o Verification That Improvements Will Provide Necessary Correction Methodology Criteria o Verification That Control Room Modifications Do Not Introduce New HEDs Methodology o Coordination of the DCRDR With Other Improvement Programs Plans for how this will be accomplished
REFERENCES 2.Program Plan Report for a Detailed Control Room Design Review for the Indiana 8 Michigan Electric Company, Donald C.Cook Nuclear Power.Plant, Units 1 and 2, Revision 1, December 29, 1983."Requirements for Emergency Response Capability," NUREG-0737, Supplement 1, U.S.NRC, Washington, D.C., December 1982, transmitted to reactor licensees via Generic Letter 82-33, December 17, 1982.3.NUREG-0700,"Guidelines for Control Room Design Reviews," September 1981, U.S.NRC.4.NUREG-0801,"Evaluation of Detailed Control Room Design Reviews," Draft, April 17, 1983, U.S.NRC.5.NUREG-0660,"NRC Action Plan developed as a Result of the TMI-2'ccident," May 1980;Revision 1, August 1980.6.NUREG-1000,"Generic Implications of ATWS Events at the Salem Nuclear Power Plant," April 1983.7.Generic Letter 83-28,"Required.Actions Based on Generic Implications of Salem ATWS Events," July 8, 1983.
APPENDIX C DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS 1 AND 2
SUMMARY
OF MAY 8, 1984 MEETING WITH NRC STAFF
g~kCg(,(~c++0/g g~)+i7 e4 Docket Nos.50-315 and 50-3i6 UNITED STATES NUCLEAR R EGULATOR Y COMMISSION WASHINGTON, O.C.20555 May 22, 1984.LICENSEE: Indiana and Michigan Electric Company (IMECo)FACILITY: Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant, Unit Nos 1 and 2 SUB'ECT:
SUMMARY
OF MEETING HELD ON MAY 8, 1984 WITH IMECO, SCIENCE APPLICATIONS INCORPORATED (SAI), WESTINGHOUSE (W), EXXON, ANO THE NRC STAFF TO DISCUSS THE DETAILED CONT%K ROOM DESIGN RE'/IEW (DCROR)PROGRAM PLAN The subject meeting was held in Bethesda to resolve the outstanding NRC questions on the OCROR program plan.This plan had been submitted by the licensee in their letter dated December 29, 1983.SAI, under contract to the NRC, has prepared the enclosed draft minutes of the meeting.These minutes have been reviewed by the NRC staff and are adoped as formal minutes as corrected.
The licensee has agreed to provide the additional information requested on page 6 and 7 of enclosure 1;a schedule for submission will be developed by the licensee.
Enclosures:
As stated: cc w/enclosures:
See next page David L.Wigg nton, Project Manager Operating Reactors Branch Pl Division of Licensing
Indiana and Michigan E1ectric Company Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant, Units 1 and 2-Mr.M.P.Alexich Vice Pres',dent Nuclear Engineering American Electric Power Service Corporation 1 Piverside P'.aza Columbus, Ohio 43215 Mr.William R.Rustem (2)Office of the Governor Room 1-Capitol Building Lansing, Michigan 48913 Mr.Wade Schuler, Supervisor Lake Township Baroda, Michigan 49101 W.G.Smith, Jr., Plant Manager Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant Post Office Box 458 Bridgman, Michigan 49106 U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission Resident Inspectors Office 7700 Red Arrow Highway Stevensville, Michigan 49127 Gerald Charnoff, Esquire Shaw, Pittman, Potts and Trowbridge 1800 M Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20036 Honorable Jim Catania, Mayor City of Bridgman, Michigan<9106 U.S.Environmental Protection Agency Region V Office EIS COORDINATOR 230 South
Dearborn Street Chicago',
ll 60604 Maurice S.Reizen, M.D.Director Department of Public Health Post Office Box 30035 Lansing, Michigan 48109 The Honorabl e Tom Corcoran United States House of Representatives Washington, DC 20515 James G.Keppl er Regional Administrator
-Region III U.S.Nuc l ea r Regu>a to ry Commi s s i on 799 Roosevelt Road Glen El lyn, IL 60137 J.Feinstein American Electric Power Service 1 Riverside Plaza C'olumbus, Ohio 43216 Draft Minutes Meeting Between NRC and IMECo on the OCROR of the D.C.Cook Nuclear Power Plant, Uni s 1 AND 2 Bethesda, Maryland May 8, 1984 The following are minutes for a meeting held on May 8, 1984 between the NRC and IMECo.Also, in attendance were staff from SAI, Westinghouse and Essex.Specific attenders and the organizations which they represented are shown in Attachment l.The meeting was held to provide IMECo the opportunity to provide further detailed information and address comments as a result of the NRC review of the ORCOR program plan submitted by IMECo for D.C.Cook, Units 1 and 2.The results of the staff review of the IMECo Program Plan were pro-vided to IMECo prior to the meeting.A copy of this transmittal is shown in Attachment 2.During the course of the meeting IMECo addressed NRC comments and questions and discussed issues that had surfaced relevant to their OCRDR activities.
Highlights of the discussion ar e provided below.Copies of viewgraphs presented by IMECo during its discussion are included in Attach-ment 3.ualifications and Structure of the OCRDR Team IMECo presented the organizational structure and personnel assigned to~~manage the various programs associated with their emergency response capa-bilities.Also described were the names and responsibilities of the lead individuals performing the OCROR.IMECo also provided a handout addressing Key Personnel Job descriptions (see Attachment 3).This information provided some clar ification of individual levels of effort for those per-forming the functions of the Project Review Team, the Design Review Team, and the Assessment Team.Also clarified were the responsibilities of the human factors professionals in the review and their levels of effort.Based upon the information provided mos>>of NRC concerns regarding staffing, individual levels of effort, and responsibilities were resolved.However, one remaining issue not fully addressed during the meeting should be 1
~~,~~~clarified by the licensee.This issue concerns the specific tasks assigned to the human factors professionals (consultants from Essex)and the involve-ment of a human factors specialist in the Assessment Phase of the DCRDR.(This is discussed in greater detail in the section below on HED Assess-ment.)S stem Function Review and Task Anal sis A presentation of IHECo's approach to the System Function Review and Task Analysis (SR&TA)was provided to describe the processes/methodologies used by the licensee to satisfy this requirement of NUREG-0737, Supplement 1.They indicated that the bulk of the effort will occur in the EOP development program which they intend to submit in July, 1984.They are presently gearing up for this activity.They indicated that they are aware of the results of the NRC meeting with the WOG on the task analysis and are using the MOG documents for the background of the analysis.In fact, consultants from Westinghouse will be performing this activity consistent with the MOG methodology.
Documentation generat'ed from the SR&TA will be given to the review team for the verification of task performance capabilities.
Briefly, the presentation provided a discussion of the scope and methodology that is basically derived from the top-down approach of NUREG-0700 as well as the plants own set of criteria (for event sequences).
Beginning with a selection of event sequences, they will obtain input from MOG/ERGs and EOP usage for the operation path for each sequence they'e identified.
This step provides a high-level look at operator functions.
Next they will identify systems operators must choose to recover from the event.The operator tasks will be derived from steps in the procedures.
Documentation generated will include instrumentation and controls require-ments tables, and system sequence matrices (for operator tasks).The documentation will provide a basis for a comparison and review of operator task requirements contained in task element tables.This documentation will also be used to conduct the verification of task performance capabilities and the assessment of design alternatives.
In addition to the SR&TA process IMECo briefly described the process to develop the new plant-specific EOPs from the WOG/ERGs.The licensee co~tends that the ERGs will provide the operator information and control needs on a generic level.Mhile reviewing this and other background documentation the EOP writers will look at'operation information and control needs on a plant-specific level when noting the plant-specific deviations from the ERG instrumentation and controls.The licensee intends to list these deviations while generating the modified plant-specific procedures (from what is desired with what now exists in the control room).The list of deviations is available for scrutiny by the design review team while conducting walkthroughs of the procedures to assess whether the procedure can be performed and through a comparison with.the inventory.
In this manner they propose to evaluate the availability and suitability of the instrumentation and controls to meet the operators needs to perform the required tasks.The information presented during the meeting led,to discussion con-cerning items two and four contained in NRC summary comments from the meeting on task analysis with the MOG procedures subcommittee.
Briefly, NRC staff expressed concern with IMECo's process and auditable documentation for (I)determining the operator information and control needs (that is not available from the ERG and background documentation) and (2)the process to derive the needed characteristics of the instruments and controls.The NRC provided comments to the licensee regarding the desirability of independ-ently determining information and control needs while conducting the SR&TA in conjunction with the newly developed EOPs.Specifically they were advised to generate documentation on operator needs while documenting the instrumentation and control requirements in the SRETA.A further considera-tion with the licensee's approach is one with the thoroughness and validity of evaluating operator needs while conducting walkthroughs of the procedures
~~and reviewing plant-specific deviations from ERG documents.
Concern stems from the apparent potential to uncritically accept what exists in the control room rather than scrutinizing what exists against a predetermined e set of information and control needs and their characteristics.
In conclusion the NRC advised the licensee to develop and provide a thorough description of the process and intended documentation to support a F'unction and Task Analysis for both the DCRDR and the development of EOPs.
Control Room Inventor IMECo provided info>mation regarding'he staffing and purpose of the inventory activity.R.F.Shoemaker is responsible for the development of the inventory and document control on a day-to-day basis.The licensee indicated the purpose of the inventory during discussions of the task analysis.The adequacy of'nstrument ranges, accuracy, etc., would be gained by comparing the results of the plant-specific EOP deviations against the control room inventory.
Whil e-no concerns were r ai sed with the inventory process those issues covered in the task analysis activity remain to be addressed before the purpose of the inventory can be accomplished, i.e., to ensure that the displays and controls are available and appropriate to meet the operator's information and control needs.Control Room Surve IMECo clarified that the control room survey would be performed by Westinghouse/Essex Design Review Team using the control room human engineer-ing criteria report or task plans.The task plans will be based on guide-lines provided in NUREG-0700 and will not be modified to plant-specific criteria as had been suggested in the program plan.The output of the task will be checklist observation forms (Cl0s)which will be transferred to the assessment team to determine human engineering discrepancies (HEDs);Assessment of HEDs IMECo provided a presentation of the CLO-HED generation through assess-megt of HEDs and implementation of selected design changes.A lengthy flow chart was presented on viewgraphs and copies were provided or review (see Attachment 3).Because of the sizable amount of information shown, the HRC suggested that some time would be required to digest all that was presented.
However, a few concerns were raised related to the involvement of a human factors member during the assessment and implementation phase.Specifically it was apparent that the Assessment Team did not contain a full-time human factors member;Dr.Sheridan, as a member, would be consulted only in the case of a conflict between the review team findings and the assessment team conclusions.
The process described by the licensee began with the transfer of CLOs from the review team to the assessment team who either accepts or rejects a CLO for HED status.If the CLO is rejected it will return to the design review team.The critical point raised by the NRC is that the assessment team, while containing no full-time human factors member, will not be adequate to assess the CLO's potential or probability to increase operator error nor to determine the cummulative effects of minor category 4 HEDs.This will influence the categorization or prior itization of the HED and likewise its rating/schedule for the implementation of a'design solution.IMECo responded to NRC concerns by assuring involvement of the Essex team of human factors specialists in the loop of assessment of findings.Further discussion revealed that although Essex had been tasked to document the type of potential error associated with the CLO it appeared that the potential for-error and the consequences of the error occurring was the assessment teams task.In conclusion, the NRC advised the licensee to provide documen-tation indicating the functions of each team, their level of effort, and their interface with the specific tasks allocated to each.In this documen-tation NRC concerns should be addressed.
Comments resulting from the NRC review of the program plan were addressed and those aspects of the process appeared to be'satisfactory.
Selection of Desi n Im rovements IMECo's presentation included some information describing the process to identify and select corrections for HEDs that will be resolved.The NRC staff observed that the licensee's process to propose HED corrections through design study did not appear to have the level of human factors, involvement that is appropriate.
IMECo staff indicated that the selection of design improvements would be reviewed by a design review team member, however, the documentation/flow chart does not show that to be a human factors member.This concern should be addressed by the licensee by~~providing documentation showing the functions of the teams and the specific tasks allocated to the human factors members and the level of effort.The NRC staff concerns raised from a review of IMECo's program plan were addressed during the presentation.'he licensee has shown that there exist a system to orderly track an HED from the point of HED identification
through HED assessment and implementation of HED resolutions
{see Attachment 3).Verification That Im rovements Mi)1 Provide the Necessar Correction and Do Not Introduce New HEDs The licensee indicated during the presentation that design improvements would be assessed for new HEDs and for the extent oF corrections.
Design changes will be validated and verified using drawings, the mock-up and visits to the control room.It was indicated that a human factors specialist may be present during this stage.Coordination of the DCRDR Mith Other Pro rams The licensee briefly described the attempt to integrate the various efforts by indicating that members on a'particular program are also involved in other programs.The licensee stated that personnel on the different programs are cognizant of the programs-interface.
A slide was shown to present the milestones for each program.The NRC mentioned that the licensee has yet to describe the dynamics of the interface of each program with the other.Some examples of the potential interfaces were discussed with the licensee to clarify the objectives and advantages of program coordination.
It was mentioned that IHECo is early enough in the process to connect the various programs successfully.
The licensee showed an under-standing and the intention of achieving this requirement.
In conclusion, the in-progress meeting provided the licensee with the opportunity to more fully describe the process they intend to employ to complete the DCRDR activities.
NRC staff believe that the licensee has shown a strong commitment, with a fairly complete and organized planning effort, to conduct a successful DCROR.However, to assure that the licensee has fully addressed some of the concerns raised during the course of the meeting it was requested that they submit in writing the following items: Functions of each team, personnel tasks and responsibilities and how the teams interact with one another.This is particularly
important for the Assessment and Implementation phase as discussed above.e The process he licensee will use to address i:ems 2 and 4 in the summary letter from the HOG/NRC meeting (March 29, 1984)on the task analysis requirement.
~Plan for achieving integration and coordination with other Emergency Response Capability efforts.
Attachment 1-D.C.COOK DCRDR MEETING May 8, 1984 Name Or aniza ion D.L.Wigginton J.J.Kramer C.Kain Ralph Surman Robert G.Orendi'ohn D.Young Bill Johnson Ray Ramirez Ray Roland Phuoc Le T.R.Stephens R.Shoemaker A.S.Grimes K.Toth T.J.Yoss G.Allen Elliff NRR/DL/ORB I NRR/DAFS/HFEB SAI/NRC Westinghouse Westinghouse Westinghouse Westinghouse NRC/DHFS/HFEB SAI/NRC SAI/NRC D.C.Cook/AEP AEPSC AEPSC AEPSC Essex Essex
APPENDIX D DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 LETTER AEP:NRC:0773H
INDIPN4 8 iNICHIGAN fLfCTRIC CONPANY P.O.BOX, I6631 COLUMBUS, OHIO 432l6 August 6, 1984 AEP-NRC:0773H Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant Unit Nos.1 and 2 Docket Nos.50-315 and 50-316 License Nos.DPR-58 and DPR-74 MAY 8, 1984 REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON DETAILED CONTROL ROOH DESIGN REVIEW (DCRDR)Mr.Harold R.Denton, Dixector Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, D.C.20555
Dear Mr.Denton:
This letter is in response to your staff's request for additional information made during the the DCRDR meeting held on May 8, 1984.The minutes of the May 8, 1984 meeting are contained in Mr.D.Wigginton's May 22, 1984 letter to Indiana 6 Michigan Electric Company (I&MECO).Your staff requested information concerning the following:
1.Functions of each DCRDR team, personnel tasks and responsibilities and hov the teams interact with one another.This information is provided in Attachment 1 to this letter.We are adding a full-time Human Factors Pxofessional as a member of the Assessment Team and the Project Review Team.We believe this will insure that categoxization, prioritization, design, and implementation of solutions to Human Engineering Descrepancies (HED)will receive appropxiate attention.
2.The process the licensee vill use to address items 2 and 4 in the summary letter from the WOG/NRC meeting (March 29, 1984)on the task analysis requirement.
A copy of this letter is included as Attachment 2 to this letter.Attachment 2A of this letter outlines a methodology for determining the opexator information and control needs (that is not available from the Emergency Response Guide and background documentation), and the process to derive the needed characteristics of the instrumentation and controls.To the extent possible, the operator information and control needs will be identified and documented concurrently with the identification and documentation of the operator instrumentation control requirement.
We Mr.Harold R.Denton AEP:NRC:0773H believe this approach will evaluate what exists in the D.C.Cook control rooms against a predetermined set of information and control needs and their characteristics.
3.Plan for achieving integration and coordination with other Emergency Response Capability efforts.The key personnel responsible for the integration and coordination of the various Emergency Response Capability efforts are identified in Attachment 3.The integration and coordination plan provided in Attachment 3 was adapted from the NUTAC on Emergency Response Capabilities.
We believe the Plan adecyately describes the interfaces between the separate portions of the program.This letter has been prepared following Corporate procedures which incorporate a reasonable set of controls to insure.its accuracy and completeness prior to signature by the undersigned.
Very truly yours, MPA/dew Attachments cc: John E.Dolan W.G.Smith, Jr.-Bridgman R.C.Callen G.Charnoff E.R." Swanson, NRC Resident Inspector-Bridgman
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS to AEP: NRC: 0773H Attachment 1-D.C.Cook DCRDR Project Review, Assessment, and Design Review Teams Interface.
Attachment 2-NRC April 5, 1984, Memorandum for Dennis L.Ziemann from H.Brent Clayton Attachment 2A-D.C.Cook Control Room Instrumentation and Control Characteristics Identification and Documentation Attachment 3-D.C.Cook Emergency Response Capability Integration Plan Attachment 4-D.C.Cook DCRDR Acronymns/Abbreviations
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H COCK DCRDR Project Review, Assessment and Design Review Teams Interface (1)The Project Review Team performs the management functions of review, approval and ccordizmtion of the DCBDR Program, program phases and reports.It reviews/approves the other teams work and docunentation.
It generates, initiates, reviews and approves plans and strategies to accanplish the overall program objectives.
Its primary interfaces with the Assessnent and Design Review Teams are the positions ccmmn to all three teams, the Program Administrator, the Lead Engineer and the Human Factors Specialist, and the review/approval of the teens output.The expertise of the team personnel as currently staffed to accomplish these tasks is as follows: The Program Administrator,-
presently a consulting engineer to the AEPSC Mechanical Engineering Division.Past experience involves assistant division manager responsibilities and Instrumentation
&Control Section Manager throughout the design, construction and startup of the D.C.Cook Plant.The Lead Engineer, has both IGC and operator supervision experience in control roans.He has both designed and put into service control and instrumentation systems.He has written both control and operation startup procedures.
Human Factors Specialist expertise is provided by Dr.T.A.Sheridan, a widely known industrial consultant, MIT Professor, researcher, author and editor.The Plant CoorcUamtor provides the D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant operations department representation.
He is a Senior Performance engineer on the~rations Dept.staff with five years nuclear plant experience.
The Program Manager of Westinghouse provides the team with NSSS vendor expertise with 14 years of nuclear control board layout and design, reactor protection, safeguards and testing systems.The Project Engineer provides the team overall mcpartise of project coordination and scheduling, D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant engineering design change projects planning and scheduling and construction project.planning, scheduling and coordination.
(2)The Assessnent Team is responsible for identifying CLGs and HEDs, categorizing the HEDs to establish the significance of their 1 of 22 Attachnent 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H deviation frcxn the NUM%-0700 Guidelines, and the assessing of the probability of operator error and the consequences of operator error in order to determine the priority rating for implementation of corrective actions.They assess corrective action design alternatives to determine that the required correction is provided and no new departures from NUREG-0700 are created.They select which design alternative will be impleaanted, schedule its implementation, assess the corrective action for full, partial or no fix, justify and docurrent less than full fixes.These considerable responsibilities which can involve significant caqmny resources, require a team of depth, knowledge and experience.
Nuclear plant systems expertise is provided by the various engineering manager's and plant management.
Human factors specialist input will be provided by Dr.T.A.Sheridan and another human factors specialist or ccmpany as yet not named.The expertise of the team personnel to accomplish its tasks is as follows.The Program Administrator and Lead Engineer, already described under the PRT.Instrumentation, control, safety and interlock systems engineering manageaent experience is supplied by the I&C and Electrical Generation Section Managers.D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant management expertise is provided by the Assistant Plant Manager.Operations expertise is supplied by.both the Assistant, Plant Manager and the Operations Superintendent.-Independent nuclear safety analysis and expertise is provided by the NS&L Manager.Overall program and company quality assurance expertise and company procedures and practice expertise-is provided by the Manager of Quality Assurance.
One of its primary interfaces with the Project Review and Design Review Teams are the two persons camnn to all three teams, the Program Administrator and Lead Engineer.A prism~interface with the Project Review Team is the Assessment and Implementation Reports of the Assessment 7am which requires the review/approval of the PRT.Another is the PRT review/approval of the.DRT member Design Study results and caraents for each HED that the Assessment Team requested corrective action proposals on.The Assessment Team interface with the DRT is the DRT prim;uy output of CLO's and the DRT assistance in evaluating HED's in the Assessnent Phase and DRT assistance with the Implementation Report during the Zmplertant-tion Phase.(3)The Design Review Team is essentially the"working" team.Westinghouse and ESSEX are part of the DRT and perform the bulk of all Review Phase tasks and provide the human factors specialist expertise required for Page 2 of 22
AttachMnt 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H these tasks.The AEP barbers of the DRT are responsible for reviewing LERs, assembling the Control Roan Inventory, assisting Westinghouse
&ESSEX in their tasks as required, and furnishing reference materials and docunentation to Westinghouse and ESSEX.The DRT will assist the AT with the evaluation of HEDs and.the Assessaent Report during the Assessment Phase and Implerrentation Report during the Implementation Phase.The DRT Develops the Program Plan Report&the Program&zttnary Report.Its prisrm~interfaces with the Project Review Team and the Assessment Team are the two persons ccxman to all three teams, (the Program Bihninistrator and the Lead Engineer), its prim;uy output of CEOs to the Assessment Team, and its output of Task Surrm.uy Reports reviewed/approved by the PRT.It interfaces with the AT in assisting with the evaluation of HED', developnent of the Assessment
&Implenentation Reports.The expertise of the team personnel to accanplish these design review tasks is as follows: Westinghouse and ESSEX provide extensive human factors specialist talent, NSSS and balance of plant vendor knowledge, I&C control board design, and training expense AEP provides the Program Rhninistrator
&Lead Engineer qualities defined under the PRT, mechanical and electrical instrunentation and control system engineering, D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant licensed reactor operator and operator staff and training staf f personnel, nuclear safety&licensing engineering, quality assurance engineering and project eng fleer lng Page 3 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:HRC:0773H COCK DCRDR Personnel Job Description Title: DCRDR Pxogram Administrator Nane: A.S.Groans Team: Assessnent, Project Review, Design Review Responsibilities:
- Comaunication between Management
&DCRDR Teams*Over all program scheduling
- Over all program coordination with related projects*Over all program Quality Assurance procedures
&practice*Over all program reporting&donzrentation
- HED review process*Cbtaining Technical&Administrative support as necessary Level of effort: As required.Estimated Manhours: Phase II, Task 1, 24;Task 2, 8;Task 3, 4;Task 4, 8, Task 5, 8;Task 6, 8;Phase III, Assessment, 160;Implementation, 80.Phase EV, Reporting, 60.4of 22 Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H COCK DCRDR Personnel Job Description Title: DCRDR Program Lead Engineer Narra: R.F.Shoemaker Team: Assessment, Project Review, Design Review Responsible to DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Comtunications between Program Adtninistrator
&Teens*Gmmnications between Teams&AEPSC Engineering
- Over all program Engineering Docunentation Files&Reference*Design improvements implementation coordination
- Develop control room inventory*Advise Program Administrator on HED Disposition Level of effort: As required.Estimated Manhours: Phase II, Task 1, 48;Task 2, 80;Task 3, 320;Task 4,8;Task 5, 8;Task 6, 8.Phase 1II, Assesa~t, 400;Inplenentation, 200 Phase IV, Reporting, 80.Estimated Manhours for I&C Personnel under Lead Engineer's Supervision:
Phase II, Task 3, 120 Phase III, Assessment, 2000;Implenantation, 2000 5of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H COCK DCRDR Personnel Job Description Title: DCRDR exp.am Manager (Westinghouse)
Naaa: John D.Young Team: Design Review, Project Review Responsible to DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Over all Review Phase Coordination
&Docunentation
- H~n Plan Report Developnent
&Donztentation
- Program Summary Report Development
&DonzN ntation*Control Room Human Engineering Criteria Report Developnent
&Docurrentation
- Documentation
&Caapilation of Checklist Observation Forms Level of Effort: As Required.Estimated Manhours by Manager and People Under his supervision:
Phase II, Task 1, 48;Task 2, 20;Task 3, 20;Task 5, 696;Task 6, 348, Phase IV, Reporting, 348.6of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NK:0773H COOK DCRDR Personnel Job Description Title: AEPSC Human Factor Consultant Nane: Dr.T.Sheridan Team: Assessm nt, Pxoject Review Responsible to DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Over all Ezren Factors Support to Project Review&Assessment Teens*HED Identification Verification
- HED Correction Verification
- Approve Design Review Team Review Phase Output*HED Categorization Verification Level of Effort: As Required 7of 22 00 Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H COOK DCRDR Personnel Job Description Title: DCRDR Human Factors Consultant (ESSEX)Name: Dr.G.A.Elliff Team: Design Review Responsible to DCRDR Engram Manager Responsibilities
- Checklist Observation Form Documentation
- Control Roan operating Personnel Survey Interviews, Questionaires, Docum ntation 6 Reports Control Rocxn Human Factors Survey Measurements, Docunentation,&Reports'Over all Review Phase human factors support*Review Phase task plans developnent Level of Effort: Estimated.
Estimated Manhours, by consultant or people under his supervision:
Phase II, Task 1, Crops, 166;Task 4, Crops, 1446;Task 6, 332.Sof 22 Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Gcok DCRDR 1?rogram Job Position Description Title: AEPSC Manager of Quality Assurance Nam: R.F.Kroeger Team: Assesarent Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures frcm the CRHEC Report*Identify HH)'s*HED review*Validation of HED priority*Review a Approval of HED correction reccxmendations
- Overall Quality Assurance Engineering support for Assessment Team.Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 96 manhours through 1984.Estimate 96 manhours through 1985.9of 22
Attachrent 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: AEPSC Nuclear Safety&Licensing Section Manager Narre: J.G.Feinstein Team: Assessment Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures frcm CRHEC Report*Identify HEDs*HED review*Validation of HED Priority*Review&approval of HED correction recorrrrrendations
- Qrerall Nuclear Safety and Licensing Engineering support to Assess@ant Team.Level of Effort: As required.Estimate 96 manhours through 1984.Estimate 96 manhours through 1985.10 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCBDR Program Job Position Description Title: AEPSC I&C Section Ihnager Nane: J.C.Jeffrey Team: Assessnent, Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures fran CREE Rexport*Identify HED's*HH3 review*Validation of HED Priority*Review S approval of HED correction recarxrendations
- Overall Instrurrentation and Control Engineering support for Assesmant Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 160 manhours through 1984.Estimate 320 manhours through 1985.11 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Ccok DCBDR Program Job Position Description Title: IGMECo.Senior Reactor Operator Team: Asses snent Responsible to: DCRDR Program administrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures from CIVIC Report*Identify HED's*HED review*Validation of HED priority*Review&approval of HED correction recommendations
- Overall Cook Plant Licensed Senior Reactor Operator support to Assessnent Team.Level of Effort: As Recyired.Estimate 144 manhours through 1984.Estimate 144 nlanhours through 1985.12 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: D.C.Cook Management Team: Assessment Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures fran KKEC Report*Identify HED's*HH3 review*Validation of HED priority Review&approval of HED correction reconaendations
- Orerall Cook Plant Management support to Assesarent Team.Q Zevel of Effort: As Required.Estimate 144 manhours thxu 1984.Estimate144 manhours thru 1985.13 of 22
I'ttachrent 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: AEPSC Electrical Generation Section Manager Name: R.C.Carruth Team: Assessment Responsible to: DCRDR Program Adminsitrator Responsibilities:
- Evaluate observed departures fran the CRHEC Report*Identify HEDs*HH)review*Validation of HED priority*Review a approval of HED correction recommendations
- Overall Electrical Engineering suppit for Assessment Team.Level of Effort;As Required.Estimate 96 manhours thru 1984.Estimate 96 manhours through 1985.14 of 22
Attachnent 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: DCRDR Program Plant Coordinator Name: T.R.Stephens Team: Design Review, Project Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program~ninistrator'esponsibilities:
- AEPSC and plant liaison&ccxmmu.cations
- CROPS a CRHFS coordination and scheduling
- Honitoring program progress*Reporting program status*Providing overall support to program process*Ensuring program is performed in accordance with AEPSC~k Plant Quality Assurance Program*Ensuring program objectives
&tasks are coordinated with other NUREG-0660 ef forts*Coordination of all.tasks involving Cook Plant Cperations Department Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 80 manhours in 1984.Estimate 160 manhours in 1985.15 of 22 Attachnent 1'o AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: DCRDR Program Project Engineer Name: F.Van Pelt, Jr.Team: Project Review, Design Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program administrator Responsibilities:
- Monitoring program progress.*Reporting program status.*Providing overall support to program process.*Ensuring program is performed in accordance with AEPSC QA, Program.*Ensuring program objectives
&tasks are coordinated with other NUREG-0660 ef forts.*Overall project engineering and coorcUination support for Project Review and Design Review Teams.Level of Effort: As required.Estimate 40 man hours 1984 Estimate 160 man hours thru 1985.16 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NBC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: MPSC Electrical Engineer Nane: L.P.Del4arco Team: Design Review.Responsible to DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Technical support to Assessment Team*Develop HED corrections and implementation'plans
- Help develop Program Plan Report and Program Summary Report Planning, Review, Assess@ant and implementation Phase assignments as*Overall Electrical Engineering support to Design Review Team Level of Effort: As required.Estimate 40 manhours in 1984.Estimate 160 manhours in 1985.17 of 22
Attachnmt 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: I&MKo.Trah~Personnel Team: Design Review Responsible to: DCROR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Technical support to Assessment Team, with plant training and operation procedures speciality.
Level of Effort: As Required;Estimate 100 manhours in 1984.Estimate 200 manhours in 1985.18 of 22 4
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: AEPSC I a C Engineer Nane: R.F.Shoemaker Team: Design Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Technical support to Assessment Team*Develop HED corrections and impleaantation plans*Help develop Program Plant Report and Program Surmm~Report Planning, Review, Assessment and Implementation Phase assigrzrents as directed*Overall Instnunentation
&Control Engineering support to Design Review I Te Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 80 rranhours thxough 1984.Estimate 320 manhours in 1985.19 of 22
Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: Westinghouse Training Personnel Team: Design Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program Manager Responsibilities:
- Over all Operating Procedures and TrairCing Support for Westinghouse Review Phase tasks Level of Effort: As Required 20 of 22
Attachrtsnt 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Program Job Position Description Title: AEPSC Quality Assurance Engineer Nane: J.B.Brittan Team: Design Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Technical support to Assessaent Team*Develop HED corrections and implenantation plans*Help develop Program Plan Report and Program Sumnary Report Planning, Review, Assessnant and Implementation Phase assign@ants as directed*Overall quality assurance engineering support for Design Review Team Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 40 manhours in 1984.Estimate 160 manhours in 1985.21 of 22 Attachment 1 to AEP:NRC:0773H Cook DCRDR Hmgram Job Position Description Title: AEPSC Nuclear Safety a Licensing Engineer Name: K.J.Toth Team: Design Review Responsible to: DCRDR Program Administrator Responsibilities:
- Technical support to Assessnent Team*Develop HED corrections and impleaantation plans*Help develop Program Plan Report and Program Summary Report Planning, Review, Assessment and Implarenation Phase assignments as*Overall nuclear safety analysi:s engineering support for Design Review Level of Effort: As Required.Estimate 200 manhours in 1984.Estimate 200 manhours in 1985.22 of 22
Attachment 2 to AEP:NRC:0773H
~Rlgy+a g%4 4l Op~g4 UNlTED STATES NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMlSSlON WASHINGTON, O.C.20555 April 5, 1984 Attachment 1 to MOG-84-164 I~,:..'<"~*:."-..'
'-"~: j!I~I i.:~l ppR 1 2 1984',,::".R.4.4L i':.":~~'~MEMORANDUM FOR:-Dennis L.Ziemann,,Chief Procedures and Systems Review Branch Division of Human Factors Safety FROM:
SUBJECT:
H.Brent Clayton, Section Leader Section A-Procedures Procedures and Systems Review Branch Dfvfsfon of Human Factors Safety , MEETING
SUMMARY
-TASK ANALYSIS REqUIREMENTS OF SUPPLEMENT I TO NUREG-0737 MARCH 29, 1984 MEETING WITH WESTINGHOUSE OWNERS GROUP (MOG)PROCEDURES SUBCOMMITTEE AND OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS Staff representatives met with representatives of the MOG Procedures Subcomnittee and others on March 29, 1984, to discuss the task analysis f requirements of Supplement I tg NVREG-0737 (Generic Letter 82-33).The purposes of the meeting were (I)for the Subcomittee to discuss how operator information and'control needs have been addressed by the Emergency Response Guideline (ERG)development effort, and (2)for the staff to identify any additional analysis or documentation needed for review.Mr.Doug McKinney, Subconmittee Chairman, made a brief presentation on the background of the ERG development program as it relates to the issue of task analysis.His presentation included a description of the ERG background documents, development of Revision 1 to the ERG, interactions with NRC, Supplement 1 toNUREG-0737 requirements, and an overview of how the MOG had responded to the requirements.
A copy of Mr.McKinney's transparencies is enclosed (Enclosure I).~~~~~~Mr.Ralph Surman of Westinghouse made a presentation which described in some detail the development of the ERG and the accompanying background documentation for both the Basic version and Revision I.He emphasized that one of the main objectives of the ERG is to identify the operator tasks.necessary to perform functions which are identified in the background documentation.
A copy of Mr.Surman's transparencies is enclosed as Encl osure 2.After a caucus, the staff made the following coments to the meeting attendees:
(1)Based on the presentations by Mr.McKinney and Mr.Surman, it appears that Revision 1 of the ERG and background documents do provide an adequate basis for generically identifying fnformation and control needs.
Oennis L.Ziemann 2 April 5, 1984 (2)Each licensee and applicant, on a plant-specific basis, must describe the process for using the generic guidelines and background documentation to identify the characteristics of needed instrumentation and controls.For the information of this type that is not available from the ERG and background documentation, licensees and applicants must describe the process to be used to generate this info@nation (e.g., from transient and accident analyses)to derive instrumentation and control characteristics.
This process can be described in either the PGP or OCROR Program Plan with appropriate cross-referencing.
(3)For potentially safety-significant plant-specific deviations from the ERG instrumentation and controls, each licensee and applicant must provide in the PGP a list of the deviations and their justification.
These should be submitted in the plant-specific technical guideline portion of the PGP, a1ong with other technical deviations.
{4)For each instrument and control used to implement the emergency operating procedures, there should be an auditable record of how the needed characteristics of the instruments and controls were determined.
These needed characteristics should be derived from the information and control needs identified in the background documentation of Revision 1 of the ERG or from plant-specific information.
(5)It appears that the Basic version of the ERG and background documentation provide an adequate basis for generica11y deriving information and control needs.However, because of the differences in the organziation of the material in the background documents between Basic and Revision 1, it is apparent that it would be easier to extract the needed information from the Revision 1 background documents.
At the conclusion of the meeting, there was general agreement with the staff's comments among the owners'epresentatives present.Enclosure 3 is a list of attendees.
Enclosures:
As stated.H.Brent Clayton, Section Leader Section A-Procedures Procedures and Systems Review Branch Oivision of Human Factors Sa,.ety.k'~%I(S O.HcKinney
Attachment 2A to AEP:NRC:0773H D.C COOK CONTROL ROOM INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS IDENTIFICATION AND DOCUMENTATION The following will define the instrumentation and control characteristics that are necessary for proper operator response to emergency transients.
Supporting basis documentation will also be developed.
The documentation developed as part of this program will complement the documentation being developed as part of the existing D.C.Cook Task Analysis Program in satisfying the needs of the CRDR review team and the requirements of the NRC.The program scope includes the definition of a process and the development of documentation to identify instrumentation and control characteristics based on operator information and control needs during emergency operations.
The process and documentation will be based on the same representative event sequences (Table 2A-1)and emergency operating procedures (Table 2A-2)that the present D.C.Cook Task Analysis Program is based.Process The process for identification of instrumentation and control characteristics will be as follows: 1.The set of operator functions for response to emergency transients will be reviewed and finalized.
2.The selected subset of D.C.Cook Emergency Operating Procedures (EOP's)will then be reviewed and procedure steps will be mapped into the operator functions in a manner similar to that shown in Figure 2A-1.
Attachment 2A AEP:NRC:0773H Page 2 3.For each operator function, the generic background documentation (Step Description Tables)will be reviewed to identify: o Operator information and control needs necessary to support the operator functions.
o Plant systems necessary to provide information and control needs.o Plant instrumentation and contzols necessary to provide information and control needs.4.For each operator function, instrumentation and control characteristics will be identified based on the required information and control needs.Characteristics for instrumentation will include: 0 0 0 0 o Units Range Resolution/Sensitivity Accuracy Response Time Type-Discreet values and/oz continuous (trending) b.Characteristics for indications and controls will include: 'o Type-Discreet (on-off)and/or continuous (variable)
Documentation The results of the evaluation process will be provided in an INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS FOR EHERGENCY RESPONSE document.This document
Attachment 2A AEP: NRC: 0773H Page 3 will consist of the following major sections: l.Introduction 2.Description of Operator Function Evaluation Process Description of Operator Function Information and Control Needs For each operator function, summary documentation will be provided to describe: a.information and control needs.b.plant systems required to provide information and control needs.c.~instrumentation and controls required to provide information and control needs.d.characteristics of instrumentation and controls required to provide information and control needs.-4.Description of Instrumentation and Control Characteristics For each instrument and control, summary documentation will be provided to identify the required characteristics.
The basis for the identified characteristics will be established by referencing appropriate discussion in Section 3 above, and/or the appropriate information in the generic ERG Revision 1 back-ground documentation or appropriate D.C.Cook documentation.
The instrumentation and control characteristics will also be included on the Instrument Requirements Tables and Control Requirements Tables being developed as part of the present task analysis documentation.
Development of the INSTRUMENTATZON AND CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS FOR EMERGENCY RESPONSE document may result in the redefinition of the change on the CRDR results.Although such changes are possible, a significant number of such changes are not expected.
TABLE 2A-1 EVENT SE UENCES SELECTED FOR D.C.COOK TASK ANALYSIS PROGRAM o Spurious Safety Injection o Loss of reactor coolant (small break-1 inch diameter)o Loss of reactor coolant (small break-4 inch diameter)*o'oss of reactor coolant (large break)0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Loss of secondary coolant Combined loss of reactor and secondary coolant Steam generator tube rupture (design basis)Steam generator tube rupture (multiple ruptures in one steam generator)*
Steam generator tube rupture (ruptures in more than one steam generator)*
Anticipated Transient without Scram*Inadequate core cooling (resulting from failures in emergency core cooling system)*Inadequate core cooling (resulting from loss of secondary heat sink)Pressurized thermal shock*Event sequences recommended in NUREG-0700 TABLE 2A-2 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURES SELECTED FOR D C.COOK TASK ANALYSIS PROGRAM Reactor Trip or Safety Injection SI Termination 1 Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant Post-LOCA Cooldown and Depressurization Transfer to Cold Leg Recirculation Trans'fer to Hot Leg Recirculation Faulted Steam Generator Isolation Steam Generator Tube Rupture Post-SGTR Cooldown.Using Steam Pump Critical Safety Function Status Trees Response to Nuclear Power Generation/ATWS Response to Inadequate Core Cooling Response to Loss of Secondary Heat Sink Response to Iminent Pressurized Thermal Shock Conditions
FI60RE 2A-j.FUNCTIONS VERIFY AUTOHAT I C ACTUAT I ONS DIAGNOSE PLANT COND IT IOH INN./REG RCS BORON CONCEN'TRATION NOH./REG RCS PRESSURE NON./REG RCS TENPERATURE NON./REG RCS INVENTORY NN./REG SECOHDARY PRESSURE NOH./REG SECONDARY INVENTORY NON./REG CONTAII4IENT EHVIROHHENT EVALUATE EQIIPNENT STATUS r r<DELINE E-3 AN GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE I/j//2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 HQTE: The blocks alonn the ton are the Various Functions a control room onerator would be exnected to nerform durinn a Steam Generator Tube Runture transient condition.
The numbers at the bottom indicate the various stens in the rieneric Guideline E-3 for a Steam Generator Tube Rupture.In order to nerform the Functions alonn the ton, monitor/renulate RCS Boron Concentration for example, the ooerator will use information various Emernency 9nerating ,"rocedures, in this case from step 26 in the Generic Guideline E-3 for a Steam Generator Tube Ruoture.
Attachment 3 to AEP:NRC:0773H D.C.COOK EMERGENCY RESPONSE CAPABILITY INTEGRATION PLAN In accordance with NUREG-0737, Supplement 1, American Electric Power Service Corporation (AEPSC)proposes to integrate the overall Emergency Response Capabilities in the following manner.K.J.Toth, of the Nuclear Engineering Division, has been appointed as the overall project coordinator (indicated on Figure 3-1).As overall coordinator, K.J.Toth is responsible for the integration of all the NUREG-0737, Supplement 1 elements designed to enhance the, control room operators ability to comprehend plant conditions and cope with emergencies.
These elements, the Safety Parameter Display System (SPDS), Detailed Control Room Design Review (DCRDR), Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs), Regulatory Guide 1.97 (RG 1.97), and the Emergency Operating Facilities (EOF)including the Technical Support Center (TSC), all have appointed Lead Engineers (also indicated in Figure 3-1).These Lead Engineers, or their designated alternates, form the Emergency Response Capabilities Council which will meet at periodic intervals and according to need.Plans and schedules have been developed for each of the elements (Figure 3-2).Functions of each element have been established and discussions held to determine how each of the elements relate to each other and how they must interface to provide Emergency Response Capability.
Each Lead Engineer is responsible for the scheduling and coordination of activities within his project, and the coordination of his project as it interfaces the other emergency response capabilities projects.Figure 3-3 shows the interfaces that will be considered between the basic elements of the emergency response capability implementation plan.Each element and its relation to previous and succeeding elements is discussed in the following plan descriptions.
Attachment 3 to AEP: NRC: 0773H Page 2 CRDR ELEMENT The AEP/I&MEC Detailed Control Room Design Review Program Plan Report provides the method for performing the entire review.The Control Room Inventory task has been accomplished., The Operating Experience Review has been performed and has identified and documented some operational problems.The Control Room Human Factors Survey is almost complete and has'also identified and documented some problems.The Systems Function and Operator Task Analysis Review is being conducted by a Consultant.
The required instruments and controls determined by this review will be compared with the Control Room Inventory in the Veri-fication of Task Capabilities Review to determine availability and human engineering suitability.
The control room information and control functions will be validated by the upgraded EOP walk-through-talk-through process using selected EOP's.Control Room additions associated with the SPDS and incorporation of RG 1.97 recommendations will be given human factors evaluation.
The Control Room improvements will be coordinated with changes resulting from other programs such as EOP, RG 1.97, SPDS, and ERF.EOP ELEMENT The Cook Plant EOPs are being developed for the purpose of mitigating the consequences of a broad range of initiating events, and subsequent multiple failures or operator errors, without the need to diagnose a specific event.These procedures are function-oriented and are being written with human factors considerations to improve human reliability.
These EOPs are being developed based upon a writer's guide, NSSS generic technical guidelines and a plant specific analysis.The adequacy of these procedures are dependent upon the trained operator's needs.EOPs will be checked for completeness, understandability, technical correctness, usability, and compatability with the control room.In
Attachment 3 to AEP:NRC:0773H Page 3 order for operators to have confidence in the EOPs, all of these criteria must be met.A walk-through of the initial EOPs has been scheduled for the purpose of evaluating these criteria.The EOP walk-through will be conducted in the control room and by using a full-sized photographic mock-up of the control room.Although Figure 3-3 shows only one EOP walk-through,.we intend to repeat the process as necessary.
Plant specific EOPs will be incorporated in an iterative process with Control Room HEDs, the application of RG 1.97 recommendations, SPDS design bases, and Emergency Response Facility criteria.This interactive process will be used to determine what changes can be made to the EOPs to accommodate
.deficiencies in other areas without impacting the effectiveness of the EOPs.Because all of the elements that impact EOPs will not be available at the same time, the interaction process between EOPs and the other impacting elements will be conducted as each element is developed.
Both the upgraded plant specific EOP's and the SFTA of selected EOPs are being performed by W and, except for refinements, are complete.The EOP group at Cook will begin the verification of those upgraded procedures and the DCRDR Design Review Team will begin the verification of operator task capability with the.SFTA and CRI.Contxol Room operator walk-through/talk-through of plant specific upgraded EOPs for validation of the procedures will also involve DCRDR human factors specialists on selected procedures to satisfy the DCRDR validation of control room function review task.RG 1.97 ELEHENT A complete set of design criteria is being developed to form a basis for the plant instrument-selection.
Utilizing the design criteria, as well as the post-accident instrumentation requirements identified from the CRDR task.analysis and EOPS's, a specific list of accident monitoring instrumentation, including qualification criteria and locations will be developed.
The list will also provide feedback to the control room design review.ERF design Attachment 3 to AEP:NRC:0773H Page 4 criteria will provide additional input to the RG 1.97 list.Once the list is finalized in design, an iterative process will be conducted to consider changes associated with EOPs, Control Room improvements, SPDS design and ERF design.Regulatory Guide 1.97 Type A instrumentation, which is critical to the emergency response capability of the Control Room, will be identified when the upgraded EOPs are available in July, 1984.Evaluation of the Type B through E Categories 1 through 3 will begin approximately August 1, 1984.Any new instrument that is added to the.Control Room to satisfy RG 1.97 requirements will undergo human engineering analysis by the DCRDR Design Review Team or will be verified for acceptable human engineering practice by reviewing the guidelines established by the DCRDR Program.SPDS ELEMENT The SPDS installation is well under way and was developed with cognizance of current NRC and other generic guidelines.
interfaces with other NUREG-0737, Supplement 1 elements are defined and understood, which will enhance integration.
To ensure an effective SPDS, the design specified hardware, inputs, software, and identified SPDS user(s), locations, and availability were evaluated.
The SPDS at the Cook Plant is designed to serve as an operator aid in monitoring and analyzing the critical safety functions.
The SPDS design considers operator usability and compatibility with plant-specific EOPs.SPDS usability is essential to the effectiveness of the system.The human factors engineering for the SPDS, as well as guidance for other factors that influence usability, have been provided by the vendor, Westinghouse..
Iteration is an ongoing process, as long as significant HEDs exist or any changes that could impact the SPDS or any of the other NUREG-0737, Supplement 1 elements.Coordination is essential to effectively determine modifications to the SPDS (or any of the other elements)without creating additional discrepancies.
Attachment 3 to AEP: NRC: 0773H Page 5 ERF ELEMENT The D.C.Cook Emergency Response Facilities and the Emergency Response Plan have been completed/developed in cognizance of current NRC guidelines.
The facilities and plan have been tested and satisfactorily demonstrated functionality.
However, the ERF and the Emergency Response Plan will continue to be included in an iterative process with other elements of NUREG-0737, Supplement 1.These include Control Room improvements,, plant-specific EOPs, specific RG 1.97 application and SPDS design.This iterative process will continue as an ongoing commitment.
The AEP/ZaMEC DCRDR Program has been conceptually promulgated as a living program, whereby all future additions or revisions to the Control Room will be subjected to a review process established by the DCRDR.All functional requirements of each of the elements of the Emergency Response Capabilities will he reviewed by as many of the DCRDR-Design Review and/or Assessment Teams as necessary to assure Human Factors engineering evaluation and assessment of any given improvement.
AEPSC L>iERGEicCY RESPONSE CAPABI LIT t ES i<UCLEAR EiIGItIEERIikG DIVISION OVERALL PROJECT COORDINATOR KARL-J TOTH SPDS O.ll.-SPOIISBLLER DCRDR A.S.GRIf1E R.SHOEfMKE EOP'S ll.Y, FOUA (AEPSC)EOP'S ll.BAKER (PLAHT)NERGENCY OP ERAT IlJG FACILITIES l'1, J, JURY REGULATORY GUIDE 1.97 R.SHOBERG I.'SO
,
~~AEP-D.C.COOK EMERGE N RESPONSE CAPABILIT S FLOW CHART I I 983 z O N 0 J F M 1984 J A 0 N D J F M A M 1985 A S UNIT I-SOFT WARE DEBUG UNIT 2-SOFTW AAE DEOUG SPDS DGRDR EOP'0 UNIT I-INSTALL SIGNAL d HARDWARE 100%COhIPLETE NRC COMMITMENT I 98%COMPLETE PHASE I PHASE II TASK I PPR TO NRC LER REVIEW COMPLETED CROPS NCTION NALYSIS TEM FU ASK A SYS d T TASK 2 CAI ASK 3 90K COMPLET E UPDATES DING ONQ I-TASK 4 TASK 5 TASK 8~PHASE IH VERIFY PHASE I PAEPAAE PAOCEDURES G STATUS AEPOAT TO NRC-COMPLETED I I NEAATION PACKAGE VERIFICATION d VALIDATION UNIT 2 INSTALL SIGNALS d HARDWARE I I I)I~l g I)I INTEAMEOIATE I ISTATUS REPORT I NAC COMMITMENT ALID AT I I I PG I l T.FOR PHASE III P NAC COMMITMENT SPDS, TSC,OSC.AND EOF STATUS REPORT NCR COMMITMENT OCRDR FINAL SUM TARGET MARY SPPS,TSC.OSC, ANO EOF OPERATIONAL TARGET PREPARE EOP'e ENQ I I I Rivi EW AAININQ OP T STATUS REPORT NAC COMMITMENT EOP: IMPLEMENTED COMMITMENT TO NRC BEG.GUIDE 1.97 RQ 1.97 PARAMETER AEVIEW NATF'YFNTS SHOWN AFTER JUNE 1984 ARE EVALUATE OUTSIDE ENQ.F 1AM TYPE A d TYPE 0 E JOB PARA.FINALIZE EQUIP COMPLETE AQ 1.97 IMPLEMENTATION TAAQET
AEPSC-D.C.COOK EMERGENCY RESPONSE INTERFACE II I INL G'7 3 7~SUPP(.EME 4'I I IIEUUIAL'MEtlTS STEP 0 PLAN INITIATION Eol>>LAW DONOR I'ROIellhtk
>>L All RG I.U7 PLnrl S>>DS PL Atl CRF PLAtl STEP 1 DEVEI PP INPUT wAITERS CRITERIA GENEAIC GUIDELINES
- A*IIUMAtl~AG I,S7 CIIITICAL EPF NON U'IILITY SFTA CRI OER CRS FACTORS oESIGN SAFETY 4 7 CRITERIA CAPABILITY AESPOIISE EtlGINEERING CRITEAIA FUNCTIONS A A CAPABILITY STEP 2 INITIAL EVALUATION PLANT SPECIFIC EOP'S (INITIAL)EOP WALK T II 4 0 U G I I Vf RIFICATION VALIDATION SPECI I AG 1.97 (INITIAL)APPLICATION SPDS DESIGN BASES (INITIAL E,PF (INITIAL)CRITERIA HED'S ITE4ATION STEP 3 DETERMINATION STEP 4 INTEGRATED REVIEW.PLAN HUMAN FACTORS IMP4OVEMENTS ANO UPGRADES INTEGRATED REVIEW PLAN SFTA-SYSTEN FUNCTION TASK ANALYSIS*NOTE CRI-CONTROL ROON INVENTORY OER-OPERATOR EXPERIENCE REVIEW CRS-CONTROL ROOM SURVEY IIED's-HtNAN ENGINEERING DESCREPANCIES STEP 5 FINAL CRITERIA DEVELOPMENT TRAINING sPos F IN AL EOP'S CA MODIFICATIONS FINAL AG'.97 I tl S 7 U ME N 7 A 7 I 0 N EAF C4I TERIA STEP B VERIFICATION 8, VALIDATION STEP 7 FINAL PLAN VERIFICATION ANO VALIDATION REVIEW IMI'LLMEtllATIOtl PLAtt OTNER NAC ISSUES
Attachment 4 to AEP:NRC:0773H COCK DCRDR ACRCNYMNS/ABBREVIATICNS AEPSC AXT ASST.MCR AT CLO COOR.CBHEC CRHFS CRX CROPS CRS CTF DCRDR DRT DWGS EZD ENG EGG EOP GEN.P@K HED 5CR MED bGR NH)NRC NS&L QER PPR PRT QA RFC SECT SECTR SFZA SPDS W WCr/ERG.NO.AMERICAN 1KZCTRIC PCNER SERVICE CORPORATICN, ACTICN ITEN TRK2(ZNG ASSIPZAÃT MANAGER ASSESSMENT TEAM CHECK(LIST QBERSERVATICN COORDINATOR CCNTML RQCN HUMAN ENGINEERING CRITE2GA CCMHKL KXM HUMAN F2KTORS SURVEY CCÃZRQL ROCN INVERT%CCNTBOL ROC'PERATING PERSCNNEL SURV1 Y C(NHKIL ROCN SURVEY C(XAAM 5T TRAVELER FCHM DEZAIUX)CONTROL ROCN DESIGN REVI1%DESIGN REVIEW TEAM DRAWINGS EUXTEGCAL ENGINEE1GNG DIVISICN ENGINEER ENGINEERING 1M'RGENCY OPERATING PROC1XSRES GENERAL PROC1XQRE NUMBER HUMAN ENGINE1&ING DZVISICN MATERIAL CC5TROL RECORD MECKKICAL ENGINEZRZNG DIVISICN MANAGER NUCL1RR ENGIN1KRZNG DIVISICN NUCLEAR REGULATORY CCNMISSION NU(LAZAR SAFETY&LICENSING OPERATZCNAL EXPERXENCE REVIEW PROG1%M PLAN REPORT PRG31KT REVIEW TEAM QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUEST FQR CHANGE SECTICN SECRETARY SYSTEM FUNCTICN AND TASK ANALYSIS SA1!ETY PARAMETER DISPLAY SYSTEM WEST ZNGHCUSE WESTINGHOUSE CNNERS GROUP/EMERGENCY RESPCNSE GUIDELINES
'l APPENDIX E DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 CONTROL ROOM OPERATING PERSONNEL SURVEY INTERVIEW QUESTIONS
DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS 1 AND 2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE
217 D.C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE INSTRUCTIONS
.2.The following are questions concerning the general layout, functional organi-zation, and operational.considerati'ons in your control room.Most of the questions will require a YES or NO answer, with some additional information.
When you have comments or suggestions, use the space provided below each question.If you need additional room, use the backs of the sheets.If you do not understand a question, please ask the monitor.for clarification.
4.Please answer all of the questions as completely as possible.5.If any question does not apply to your control room, please mark it as N/A.Take as much'time as you need to complete the questionnaire.
7.All of your answers and your biographical information will be kept in the strictest confidence and will be used to aid in the performance of the detailed control room design review.PLEASE BEGIN B2-1
217 D.C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT.:"'-'-'~P.PENDIX B2".OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: Name: Age: Sex: Height: Weight'-Cur'rent Position/Title:
l.Do you have a current reactor operator's license?YES'O 2.Amount of licensed experience at this plant: Total amount licensed experience:
4.Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.): 5.Education:
a.Highest level attained: b.Specialized Schools or courses (list): 6.Military experience:
B2-'2 i0 217.WORKSPACE APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.1 1 May 1983 1.(l)Have you experienced any problems in viewing control and display~~panels (including annunciator panels)from desks and consoles placed in the primary operating area?YES NO 2.(3)Are you able to perform task actions in a convenient position at any work station?YES NO 3.(6)Is the access and movement of nonessential but authorized personnel limited to prescribed areas within the control room?YES NO 4.(7)Are provisions made for easy access to procedure manuals and other reference materials while task sequences are peformed at consoles?YES NO 5.(10)Are you able to work comfortably at desks, with proper surface height and area, and adequate knee room and chair height?YES NO.BZ-3
217.WORKSPACE APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.1 1 May 1983.(12)Are there suitable, out-of-the-way but secure places for storage of'he personal belongings of control room personnel, with adequate space?YES NO 7.(13)Do you consider the control room environment generally cheerful in terms of color and lighting?YES NO.(16)Does the carpeting or other floor covering in the control room lessen the fatigue of standing and walking?YES NO 9.(17)Do control room personnel have unlimited access to a restroom and kitchen that are dedicated to their use?YES NO 0.(18)Do these facilities have communication links to the control room, if they are out of voice contact range?YES NO B2-4
217 ANTHOPOMETRICS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.2 1 May 1983 1.(1)Have you ever had any problems operating a control because it was.too high?If yes, please explain: YES NO 2.(2)Have you ever had any problems operating a control because it was too low?YES NO If yes, please explain: 3.(3)Are there any controls that are located in such a way that it makes operating the control awkward (i.e., resting'hand on panel, leaning on rail, etc.)?If yes, please explain: YES NO4.(4)Are there any controls that are inconveniently located?If yes, please give examples: 'ES NO B2-5 S,
217.ANTHOPOMETRICS A'PPENDIX B2 OPERATE.-".:;ERVIEN/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.2 1 May 1983 I 5.(5)Have you.ever.had any problems reading a display because it was too low?If yes, please give examples: YES NO 6.(6)Have you ever had any problems reading a display because'it was too high?If yes, please give examples: YES NO B2-6
217 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.3 1 May 1983 1.(l)Is all emergency equipment'that is needed by control room personnel in the control room area?YES NO 2.(5)Are all operators well practiced in donning protective equipment?
YES NO 3.(8)Is there protective clothing available that is compatible with your S12e?YES NO 4.(9)Is there breathing equipment available that is compatible with your size?YES NO 5.(12)Do you have any problem performing your general control room duties while wearing protective equipment?
YES NO B2-7 0
217 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT APPENDIX'2 OPERATOR J~'TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.3 1 May 1983/'I 6.(13)Do you have any problems communicating with others while wearing.protectiv'e equipment, specifically breathing equipment?
YES NO7.(18)Is all.fire, radiation, and rescue equipment easily and readily accessible?
YES NO ,8.(25)Are provisions available to assure complete internal and external communications capabilities during emergencies?
YES NO B2-8
217 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDmONING APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.4 1 May 1983 e l.(l)Are there any specific areas'within the control room boundary that are not comfortable because of the temperature or humidity?YES NO 2.(2)Dc you ever notice any perceptible air motion or drafts?YES NO 3.(3)While in the control room,.does your throat or skin often becomedry'?YES NO 4.(8)Are there noticeable fluctuations in control room climate conditions?
YES NO 5.(10)Can the control room HVAC system be adjusted as necessary?
YES NO B2-9'
217 ILLUMINATION TP-1.5 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERAS.::"-.:
~.RVI" V4/QUESTIONNAIRE k 1.(3).Are there areas in the primary operating area where illumination is not suf f icient for, the task performed?
YES NO 2.(4)Do shadows ever interfere with reading labels, instructions,'nd other written information?.
YES NO 3.(5)Does glare ever interfere with the readability of displays, labels, or indicators?
YES NO 4.(6)Are colors used on panel surfaces, controls, and displays recognizable under both normal and emergency lighting conditions?
YES NO B2-'10 i
217 AMBIENT NOISE APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR'INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.6 1 May 1983 1.(l)Have you noticed any difficulty with verbal communications between any two points in the control room?YES NO 2.(2)Have you noticed any particular noise distractions originating inside the control room?YES NO 3.(3)Have you noticed any particular noise districtions'originating outside the control room?YES NO Are there any particular time periods when noise levels are either too high or too low?YES NO 5.(5)Do you feel that general background noise is too high?YES NO B2-11
217 MAINTAINABILITY APPENDIX B2 OPERATE::-.l.','TERVIEW(QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.7 1 May 1983 II 1.(l)Do you have an adequate supply of expendable items such as ink,'ens, pri'nter paper, etc.?If NO, please list the expendables and the amounts you feel you need.YES NO 2.(2)Do you have an adequate supply of spare parts such as fuses, bulbs, etc.?If NO, please list the spare parts and amounts you feel you need.YES NO~3.(3)Da you have all necessary and'special replacement tools that are needed to install expendables and spare parts available in the control room?If NO, please.list the tools you need.YES.NO 4.(7)Is there ample storage space available in the control room for expendables, spare parts, and tools?YES NO 5.(8)When different types, sizes, or styles of expendables are required, are , they clearly visible?YES NO B2-12
217 MAINTAINABILITY APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.7 1 May 1983 6.(9)When different types, sizes,.or styles of spare parts are required, are they clearly marked?YES NO 7.(13)If bulbs are replaced in annunciator'panels that require legend tiles to be removed, are the tiles marked to ensure that.they will be replaced~in the correct position?YES NO 8.(15)Are the legend pushbuttons in your control room provided with either dual filaments, dual.lamps, or lamp test function?YES NO 9.(16)Can you replace bulbs in legend pushbuttons from the front of the panel?YES NO'10.(19)Are legend covers keyed or marked in some way to prevent you from interchanging the covers?\YES NO B2-13
217.MAINTAINABILITY APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR'i TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-1.7 1 May 1983.(20)Do all indicator lights have either dual filaments, dual bulbs, or bulb test function?.YES NO 12.(21)Can you replace indicator light bulbs easily, with the power on, and without danger to yourself or the equipment?
'ES NO B2-14 44 217 COMMUNICATIONS TP-2.1 15 Aug 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 1.(3)Are there any conditions under which the conventional-powered, tele-phone system is difficult to use because of noise or some other f.actor?YES NO If yes, please explain: 2.(4)Are there any conditions under which the sound-powered telephone system is difficult to use because of noise or other factors?YES NO If yes, please explain: 3..(5)Are there any conditions under which the walkie-talkie system is difficult to use because of noise or other factors?YES NO If yes, please explain: 4.(6)Are there any conditions under which the fixed-base UHF system is difficult to use because of noise or other factors?YES NO If yes, please explain: B2-15
217.COMMUNICATIONS TP-2.1 15 Aug 1983;.APPENDIX B2.OP ERAT~R INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 5.(7)Have y'o'u ever had any problems transmitting or receiving messages over.the PA system?YES NO If yes, please explain: 6.(8)Does the PA system ever interfere with reception of'incoming alarms?YES NO If yes, please explain: 7.(9)Are emergency backup communications equipment adequate for'll anticipated operating modes?YES NO If no, please explain: B2-16
217 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR'NTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.(l)Do you have a first out annunciator panel where only the tile associated with the reactor trip event illuminates and all subsequent alarms on that panel are"locked out"?~YES NO 2.(5)Is the annunciator system priority coded by color, position, sha'pe, or symbolic coding of the tiles?YES NO I'(13)Are auditory signals priority codedby pulse, frequency change (warbling), intensity', or different frequencies.
for different signals?YES NO 4.(l7)Do any of the alarm horns startle or irritate you?YES NO 5.(28)Are all tiles dark on annunciator panels when no alarm is indicated?
YES NO B2-17 217'NNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B2 OPERA'!." I(i TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE'P-3.1 1 May 1983 6.(29)Can you easily'ell if a tile is nor'mally on for an extended duration during normal operating conditions?
YES NO 7.(30)Are you immediately aware if an annunciator tile is out of'service?
YES NO 8.(32)Do you know of any alarms that occur so frequently that you consider them a nuisance?YES NO 9.(33)Do you know of any alarms that do not give you ample time to respond to a warning condition?
YES NO 10.(34)When responding to an alarm tile,'can you readily locate the controls and displays required for corrective or diagnostic action?YES NO B2-18,
217 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-3.1 1 May 1983 1.(38)If alarms are used that require information outside the control room, do they allow you ample time to respond?YES NO12.(41)Do you have any tiles with dual messages such as HIGH-LOW?YES NQ B2-19
217~CONTROLS APPENDIX B2 OPERAT'-'.ized TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-4.1 1 May 1983 1.(l').Do you.know of any controls that activate a critical function that do not have a movable cover or guard?YES NO h 2.(3)Do you'know of.any areas on the board where toggle, lever, or pushbutton controls should be replaced with.rotary controls because of accidental activation?,.
YES NO 3.(5)Have you'ever had difficulty activating a control because'an adjacent control was in the way?YES NO 4.(6)Do you know of any controls that interlock unnecessarily?
YES NO 5..(8)When a strict sequential activation is ne'cessary, do you know of any controls which are not provided with some type of interlock?
YES NO B2-'20 4 0 217 CONTROLS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-4.1 1 May 1983 6.(10)Can you recall any controls.that you are ne'ver required to use?YES NO 7.(ll)Are there any controls that are duplicated unnecessarily?
YES NO 8.(13)Are there any controls that you would expect to be of a certain type or size, and they are not?YES NO 9.(24)Can you recall any knobs or handles of control switches that slip or are loose on their shafts?YES NO 0.(25)Are there any controls that move so easily that you can't tell when you'e activated them?YES NO B2-21 S 0
.217.CONTROLS APPENDIX B2 OP~RAT~.'l!TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-4.1 1 May 1983 C.(30)Do you know of'any small J-handles that should be larger because of'he torque required to operate them?YES NO 12.(34)Are there any controls that are difficult'to adjust to the precise level you need'?YES NO 3.(35)Do~u get immediate feedback that a pushbutton has been activated?
YES NQ B2-22
217 DISPLAYS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-5.1 1 May 19B3 1.(2)Is system/equipment status inferred by any indicator light being off~~instead of illuminated?
YES NO 2.(13)Do you know of any scale ranges which are too wide for the maximum displayed values Keir meter never indicates over half scale)?YES NO 3.(10)Do you know of any scales where maximum values are too large for the scale (i.e., pointer reaches maximum, then stops)and supporting wide-range instruments are not provided?YES NO 4.(15)Do all meters fail off-scale?
YES NO 5.(17)Do you know of any multiscale displays (i.e., single pointer, multiple scales)that should be single scale displays?YES NO B2-23 217, DISPLAYS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR I,"i TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-5.1 1 May 1983 6.(18)Are any of the multiscale displays confusing to read?YES NO 7.(19)Are any displays difficult to read because of poor contrast between the pointer and the background?
YES NO 8.(21)Are all recorders that you are required to use located within your primary work area?YES NO 9.(22)Do you know of any recorders that are used for a purpose other than to record trend information and material for later reference?
YES NO 10.(25)Can you easily read all the data through the window of the recorder without opening it?YES NO B2-24 217 DISPLAYS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR'INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-5.1 1 May 1983 O 1.(26)Do you know of any graphic recorders in which the ink clogs the pens or smudges the paper?YES NO 12.(29)Do you know of any strip chart or impact recorders in which the pens or the printing heads are frequently driven to their maximum, then tend to mechanically or electrically.
hang up?YES NO.(30)Where multiple channel inputs are control-or switch-selectable for display on a strip chart recorder, do you know.of any case where after input selection, there is an appreciable delay before the parameter is actually displayed?
YES NO B2-25 0
217.LABELS'AND LOCATION AIDS APPENDIX B2 OPERATE;.-, I!i TERVIEiV/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-6.1 1 May 1983 1.(7)Are controls;displays, and other equipment items appropriately and clearly'abeled to enable rapid and accurate location, identification, and manipulation (if applicable)?
YES NO.2.(8)Are labels pertinent to control actuation visible during actuation?
'ES NO.3.(10)Do labels describe the primary function of equipment items?YES NQ 4;(ll)Do the words employed in the label express exactly what action is intended, if action is necessary?
YES NO 5.(12)Are instructions on labels clear and direct?YES NQ B2-26
217 LABELS AND LOCATION AIDS APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW]QUESTIONNAIRE TP-6.1 1 May 1983.(13)Do words have a commonly accepted meaning for all users?YES NO Ib 7.(14)Are there any unusual technical terms used in labels?YES NO 8.(15)Are there any symbols (e.g., abstract symbols like%)which have uncommon meanings?YES NO 9.(18)Does the method used for"tagging-out" a control prevent actuation of the control?YES NO B2-27 217 COMPUTER SYSTEM TP-7.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATO~" i!" TERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE 1.(l), Have.you eve'r experienced any problems with the computer system such as accessing a file or locating information?
YES NO If yes, please explain: 2.(2)Have you ever experienced any'problems with the computer system printers?YES NO If yes, please explain: 3.(3)Have you ever experienced problems with the computer system CRTs?YES NO If yes, please explain: 4.(4)Have you ever experienced any problems with the computer system keyboards?
YES NO If yes, please explain: B2-'28
217 COMPUTER SYSTEM APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR'INTERVIEW/QUESTIONNAIRE TP-7.1 1 May 1983 5.(6)Is the computer dialogue logical?If not, please explain: YES NO 6.(7)Is the computer dialogue vocabulary and syntax-common to the operators who use the system?.If not, please give examples: YES NO 7.(8)Is the data presented on the CRT screen in a readily usable format?If not, please explain: YES NO 8.(9)Are urgent messages requiring an imemdiate response highlighted to attract the operator's attention?
If not, please give examples: YES NO B2-29 217, COMPUTER SYSTEM TP-7.1 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATO-;, INTERVIEW/GiUESTIONNAIRE,~~.(11)Do general messages displayed on a CRT provide the information necessar'y to complete a specific action or decision sequence?If not, please explain: YES NO 1 LO.(12)"Are alarm messages readily distinguishable from other messages?If not, please give examples: YES NO 11.(13)Does the wording of alarm messages clearly relate to the specific annunciator tile that is illuminated?
YES NO If not, please explain:.(16)Are graphs and tables displayed on CRTs easy to read or interpret?
.'f not, please give examples: YES NO B2-30 A
APPENDIX F DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2
SUMMARY
SHEETS FOR CONTROL ROOM OPERATING PERSONNEL INTERVIEWS S
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 3+7(RO n=20 n=/6 n=g SRO/SS n=15 n=f 0 n=o TOTAL n=49 n=3g>4 r c v-zv~v<~ma i~~w~cw Assptayz QFa.Np 0~co~w<hs a<~Kawn3ow, gMcQ~hX~V~$VD+Ax V'~g~s'~>%eaVm nQs(+sg, c.a~hra~i)
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=lo RO n=20 n=O Ot", SRO/SS n=15 3 n=/cr n=O TOTAL n=49 n=/~+2 lo n=2 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 0 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=l4 n=/o//V~/CP RO n=20 n=/(0/SRO/SS n=15 n=p n=7 n=g TOTAL n=49 p~/I n=C/gf 1 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=ip n=7 SRO/SS n=15 4 u"~TOTAL n=49 E7/
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 00 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=a RO n=20 n=i p n=7 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=3!.7 n=
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=3 4/fv n=fl n=0 RO n=20 iO 1o n=y n=i6 SRO/SS n=15 n=p OF/QO 7~n=g~TOTAL n=49 c.7 n C>
4 8 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=la RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=t+/
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=q RO n=20 n=/3 n=7 3~'K SRO/SS n=15 n=/3/3~TOTAL n=49 n=3Q n='3 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 n=l~n=0 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 (P 7 n=3+n=I~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=3.n=O g t'y RO n=20 n=}p (.'SRO/SS n=15 CC', n=i~n=0 Q'7 TOTAL n=49 n=~-i (-" n=C p~f~P iNicoN<<z em~~h'"~~~~g~~~w~~~W a.sc~oh 9~<<cu~h<g~Gum"c go.ca%,0.~
sQ w~<h~cs~~a+Qs A~M%ah~(av~Q'4Mmg%, tw~$g)q~g$g~gz w&44K~4k~WE<C,'lk<ggg,
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=/(n=s 7'7, RO n=20 n=g q SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=p n=7 n=g/7 n=0 0'/g 7~c~-%.yg,iq~yk~54 gkU.4(xw c~'c~Q.~~M'ol4>c%~g~~gg~4Q~~~c~a~mw~hh Qgv'g oD<~Seats EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49~b, w<C4w EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=/Q SRO/SS n=15 n=JP 7 n=(TOTAL n=49 n=
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=I&RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 n=(~TOTAL n=49 n=Q 9 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=t RO n=20 n=p SRO/SS n=l5 n=J n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/n=/>n=/RO n=20 n=/)SRO/SS n=15 f~~l 5 0 g5 TOTAL n=49 EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=~4 n=0 RO n=20<(i 7 n=/7 n=3 0~a SRO/SS n=15 n=3 gr.g TOTAL.n=49 n=O EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=g 7/-RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49'c'K~/~'7.n=O n=/g W"
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14/oo 7g 07, RO n=20 I 0 7g n=g SRO/SS n=15 n=~3 J3/n=Q TOTAL n=49 n=Q EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/g Wg u, n=f 7'O n=20 i QQ n=Qg f17 PD SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=t$n=n=/Q c.-/
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=f/'=3 RO n=20 0!,'RO/SS n=15 g g~(~c;TOTAL n=49 vx4 aw Cbv+~e~-NO'A+
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14/rod Q'7, RO n=20$07g/ol 0" f.SRO/SS n=15 n=0 TOTAL.n=49 n=0 O7~-,
Si EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=/Q n=f 7'70 RO n=20)0 g, 0"7, SROISS n=15~DU/0 n=0 o'.TOTAL n=49 n=)O n=l 2 7>
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/7,'RO n=20 5 7.n=0 0'i'RO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=(3 n=5 n=I Q'j.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO ROn=20 n=SRO/SS n=15 n=f 3 TOTAL n=49%~Cg~~+
Cll EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 0(n=(Q n=t 7'7.RO n=20 n=g SRO/SS n=15 0'7, TOTAL'=49 n=I 2'7.~~~war<cu yah 9~-g, g~++Žoh+C~g(~,SG g~~/[~qQ<<c<<k,<g~c~~~~NshiiQ g~~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=/7 07;.SRO/SS n=15 n=l g n=0 0 7.TOTAL n=49 n=37 n=S 8
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=Q RO n=20 n=/7 n=3 IS n=Q 0/, SRO/SS n=15 n=3 n=0 0<TOTAL n=49 4$
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20$07a n=7 n=/g~5 7.SRO/SS n=15 n=0 Q'T,.TOTAL n=49 n=4Q
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/g n=0 RO n=20 n=/7 n=0 0 i SRO/SS n=15 n=/7 6 T TOTAL n=49 8 9 EXPERIENCE LEYEL NR AEO n=14 n=g RO n=20 n=l SRO/SS n=15 n=/g 7a TOTAL n=49 ng 1>"'<~~<~a)~~~+~
a~v q~+i CQ,~~<<q<QQ, g$A R<+<~+p ging~vj'lpga (,C%K SQ4+)~m~a44~mV ci~.
8 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 Jo+/, n=(9.RO n=20 n=/(n=/n=Q 0 7.SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 lc:.n='f7 n=l 7 c7 QOj n=0 g~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 Cl S EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 n=II TOTAL n=49 n=37 n=Jg
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n RO n=20 n=l 5 7q SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49~7-f, (7.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=/oo/n=g SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 8
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 n=I~TOTAL n=49 h=3 7
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 Cl EXPERIENCE LEYEL F NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=(n=Q n='I ((oo 7a n=gg n=g o i,'RO/SS n=15 n=0 TOTAL n=49
%II EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20/ov'7, n=l Q n=Q n=Jt7 7, n=g c'7 c'f, SRO/SS n=15 3'7~n=/+7 j~n n=/TOTAL n=49-%,Guava ta8,444'(ns v a%cQ~Q u~k'4 4 rV 4u.v~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=t2 RO n=20/oa 70 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 7 0'7s n=t7~ch, CAW c RC~
Cl EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=t RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=t 77.T"t"/0 n=g (, n=f n=/7/.Na a<C<~~Q S,~gg,~l,c((~
k, Q 9~~gg~~4~~%<~~ply~ivy qu(ks (~S~<<QI M+'C'eh%~M4(<W~ULg+~C s~<M~<Q~C L'EYq~%4'g~~pg lg~h4Ni~g~g4%~C-
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=l5 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 f XPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 7/Q.n=/9 n=3 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 n=o TOTAL n=49 n=." 4 Cl S 49 S EXPERIENCE LEYEL AEO n=l4 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 n=/TOTAL n=49 n=5
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO RO n=20 n=Q G7~(OO 7o n=/P/M&o n=/P 0'7, SRO/SS n=15 n=Q 6"/~TOTAL n=49 n=/a j'.n=0<CoW Mhggg((y(v4~
Ochcgf WAIL)QW(~~
p~~~~~~'~~'g~~4<~6<aax>4v~wa
~aMD c~w 4 o v h~~~~++~~~+++<<M~f~<~4~w ma%'w~A,sg EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/RO n=20 n=g 0/, SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=~4<~~g~ht~Wc~~e@kh...ce~684)g 0 PK u<C~+~~
EXPERIENCE
'EVEL AEO n=14 5 o7, n=7 n=/RO n=20/g 7 n=/SRO/SS n=15 C</n=3 2 0/~n=0 TOTAL n=49 n=~1 4024%-Aa(kl46 LW$6>$bcc~ac~
~~EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 0'/, TOTAL n=49 f44,4~t~+5%gent~ok diag~~"~~~~+~"~~g~cw v a~&~<(skid (MMc?W 4K+~~$~~g},~<<>~Qz S
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 c7, SRO/SS n=15 n=)/TOTAL n=49 n=+-J n=
CS Cl EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14~I~0 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 3 7~n=7 TOTAL n=49 CII Cl EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=/(5a7, n=Jg n=/0 n=Q SRO/SS n=15 Qo/, n=<', D7 n=g TOTAL n=49$5 n=Q 7 n=0 o'I, hC C4'IAC~+g}
8'lhLSQ~~Q(g q~g p~~~Qggq~g p chal~~s Pn.~D~SR~4~R 4 i~5)Q,e s (A~Qi+(y~'c-4&3, e~~g<$~Q4~~,~(ah.~~'k~g4~4r.
0~8~.W&C%or Cog,5aM($Kk&e*R6<hi>Ms Q<w$a~(0 g$CW~yg gq~+~wQ~~fag~~~++<~).
EXPERIENCE LEYEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 c pe TOTAL n=49 n=g~
Cl EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=7/g/RO n=20 0 7~SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=/2 n=/3 7/'7.n=35 0 i 5 V,'5~+kwqvl AQ>ck g~4~pan~~~~~A h~~v p<Q~~z<W 4 4 r~4 4,~<@C>gw<w
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=/Q 0/.SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49$27~n=$g n=Q 8 SS EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=g ger/SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=I 7A 2'7.p C7 n=g n=0<~~~~~oh-waeqmlA<szem ohucw a agcy az K~4'NE.SW VKvw~yg~g(qQ~~,~~~p p~~+~~)&A.~ac.
coho,cM<~
Ill EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=/n=/7 RO n=20 7s~i~n=/SRO/SS n=15--gKi TOTAL n=49 Q o7 p ZQ gag gQ g~($c 5 LVRKLlLT~.~
Qc~~~~%<K,%i~9~okvc Q'4r~~pW~~v is>~~ih~(hog~R-.,~~,
Ill EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 0/7.RO n=20 po/407, n=SRO/SS n=15 C~e TOTAL n=49 7w 7b 20 7e.=30.=/o 7/.W<z~c~~no s a4~ms(.<<~e'c~
q~4~+~poM), D D~o.l+Lv~s ca~5>'QzcN/A~5 44M (o~lj<a4~E.g.~%<IL~Q~~, Qgg~(~w~~~8 (%'p 0 9c0 a~~c~s~~K9Q.Pa+4i4<+4%~6 R~c4~~y c~~hv~Ns~~<<~Pw4.
8 8>:
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEYEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=Q'go'7'=(Q 07 n=/SRO/SS n=15 0'7 TOTAL n=49 n=0 a-P,
EXPERIENCE LEVEL U AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 kg 7 n=9 n=0 TOTAL n=49 n=4n=47+0, M~beCCNAs'3+, Qg<g~g Yrip z Q,CP cbv YcsN<>l7cg (3~w gaU-<~~44 Q'iaq'ec~~), q,Q(,(PZR SK Qa&<'lhchu.ah,&~w 4u4qh L~~aY~
S EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=3 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 Po'~.
8 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49<<c~~c~~e~
S EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/G RO n=20~<Vo n=/0'7 SRO/SS n=15)oo/n=/S n=0 TOTAL~n=49 S 8 8 Qi,S EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 ning Cll S Cl EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 2 9'7.n 5'7, n=g SRO/SS n=15 n=/T/TOTAL n=49 gi)Q EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=//RO n=20 n=g SRO/SS n=15 pe n=l"t n=O TOTAL n=49 n=I EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=/7'7.js'7, B9/.n=n=20 n=JJ7 n=p n=0 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=J>7P j n=3 3/qi 0'"7.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=/~RO n=20 0'7.SRO/SS n=15 AQ7 G', TOTAL n=49~='to Cbw~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 6'L'M n=RO n=20 cS'=/7/5 7, SRO/SS n.=15 n=g/n=0 g~I Q TOTAL n=49%n zc ca~~s-<ur'oi w4j.Ph g kgb g~)$g~z~~0, l~%N 4 VJ(~QQ 4 pg+.SZ BlOO~YI 5 W$Q~~4 77,
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR'EO n=14 RO n=20 n=15 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=//n=fl 7Y
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 75 g SRO/SS n=15 Q7/o 0/.TOTAL n=49 n=l t"~<~<~~vKs.K%X, PC pg<gy~g~@~><<<>(%$%%I~vCkh&g)f E4~)~~~~~~g(gQs~~~<+<(<+~4w~j Q5Q.9k~<~(~~)<,)<~<C,~~V Wc4a~Mq~~~~~
~43 4 3 C 77,
i3 C35 EXPERIENCE LEYEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=l5 TOTAL n=49 n=30 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20~J gg n=/0 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 37/n=l 2'I-84Q, C.'haaQ Pczsse~ahio~.
QE,S 9<<LWCL CLCh0%gA TQPC~z$\g Pd,~k\+Apl!C Pf&lCCQ highs oc e~5+'Ka~
7 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=(7 70 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=/(37 l.n=IQ o',/>~a Cgv,~y~)QQgg~0ac~ii w+9+<~<~~"~@~a 6vgc.a i~J 5z'Fhv~c~Xn~g~~S cqg~<%~$%4ws., Q~p~$a-~~V.h,p,
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=7 I 9'7-RO n=20 n=/4 i'SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=(C 0'/,/0;~a~NW~m$Sped gg~$nz q)<~SG Sheg~gng<~~i~, Aux>Wwa~Rgq,qq, q yg q)~~~>~~4.~>>e<Q~6 S P<wss'pen eg
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=7 3 G"7.n=/S EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 2o~L 3 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49=l3~OAAtO SQ.l~Q ICKX~LMQg Qy$Qgp)f~p 1<~4 V4w 64, 9,<5up%6,),,p~g u~(>
0 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 g g~g o-'7, n=Q TOTAL n=49 n=Q
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO.n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 Ii=2 7
EXPERIENCE
'EVEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS TOTAL EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49~C (b&~
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=Q/o, 7dj n=/v%0'7, n=Q SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 Cj Q j gw~%aih+hm
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 2"f n=5 pc(n=/9 PG'7.n=/g n=g y-"/n=/Q G!il 2" j'n~c~~-CSW,QWSW,Aohw~(>
Va4up~'F'i~w C~~k>nK+hea~4c, 0 CP~>&hhnw<
+5<~<Up'F(uvl,l.ir Eg<<$<<Bur, C.n,h~im~~h
'Auw,LAN>~+~n~<<~<g,'<<>i~Ui~, R c,.4, EXPERIENCE LEVEL F NR AEO RO n=20 n=/n=/SRO/SS n=15 0/, Qy'OTAL n=49.=I>
EXPERIENCE.
LEVEL AEO n=14 n=/RO n=20 n=/g 0"!.SRO/SS n=15 n=0 Or, TOTAL n=49 n=(
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 n=tg 01.RO n=20 2~l.n=g SRO/SS n=15 n=O TOTAL n=49 s'7,
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=(a n=(RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 07/,.n=3$n=7 n=l5 3/(.n=/0'7, As c v~Huiv~why 9a4a.'AUw4o~~
K~~~Q A~~cga'-~~.S~~vms~~<<~$aec4 as QQQ 4c0$4rc 4Q<Qbw~poqip~~K tL(vts w hl cQ+<IF.vwg(0+Q.Qi~h a~p C~~sQi<<.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 7 cU TOTAL n=49 n=J7
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=7 RO n=20 go~.SRO/SS n=15 n=f/7'7.n=M TOTAL n=49 n=/g
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 RO n=20 07 SRO/SS n=15 n=J(27 lo TOTAL n=49 n=g P n=/Q.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 7/I.n=l G n=/RO n=20/0<lo n=g~SRO/SS n=15 n=1f 7'7.TOTAL n=49/0 7 n=g g n=I kw EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 RO n=20 n=P 0'7o SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 EXPERIENCE LEVEL~U AEO n=14*n=//RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 P7/~TOTAL n=49 n=g(n=7 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=,l 5 TOTAL n=[t
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 70 7~n=/Q 2 9Ž".n=Q n=(SRO/SS n=15 n=7 n=V TOTAL EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 0'7~RO n=20 3 c7 f~n=$SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 3/'7~n=I5 EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 3G 7o SRO/SS-TOTAL n=49 Z7 l.n=/3
EXPERIENCE LEVEL U AEO n=14 n=/I 0 7 RO n=20 n=/g n=7 SRO/SS n=15 0'1.TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO n=14 t9/RO n=20 n=7 3~-/5%%u, n=/SRO/SS n=15 c O)~n=/0, n=3 TOTAL n=49 n=3 c C<~QL<(<'sa~~kg XN<iu($%4at n.
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO RO n=20 SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL AEO n=14 n=/~n=/g2 7.fl=3 RO n=20 n=/, SRO/SS n=15 n=0 TOTAL n=49
EXPERIENCE LEVEL NR AEO/P RO n=20 3<7o n=(SRO/SS n=15 TOTAL n=49 n=/[n=>Q n=(t/3%@V%n=/+u a~cnn (s)-Q%(cu'a+a 4<nw 4icW a~nuv cia<<~si~ce~4,'~5'04~~.
APPENDIX G s DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 LETTER AEP:NRC:0773I AND NRC RESPONSE
INDIANA&MICHIGAN ELECTRIC COMPANY P,O.8OX 1dd31 COLUMBUS, OHIO 432)d September 28, 1984 AEP:NRC:0773I Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant Unit Nos.1 and 2 Docket Nos.50-315 and 50-316 License Nos.DPR-58 and DPR-74 JUNE 12, 1984 CONFIRMATOFl ORDER-STATUS REPORT ON DETAILED CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW (DCRDR)AND UPGRADED EMERGENCX OPERATING PROCEDURES (EOPs)Mr.Harold R.Denton, Director Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation U.S.Nuclear Regulatory Canmission
Dear Mr.Denton:
This letter is submitted in compliance vith your June 12, 1984 Licensing Order to the Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant Unit Nos.1 and 2.The order specifically obligated the American Electric Power Service Corporation to submit to the NRC by September 30, 1984 the following:
1.A Detailed Control Room Design Review (DCRDR)status report which vill include the current pro)cot status and a completion date for the DCRDR Summary Report which will include a proposed schedule for iaplementation, and 2.The Upgrade Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs)-Procedures Generation Package.The attached table shows the status of the DCRDR as of September 1, 1984.As the table indicates (Attachment 1), Phase I (Planning) of the DCRDR is essentially complete.This statement is predicated on the anticipated acceptance by your staff of the information provided in our August 6, 1984 submittal.
Phase II tasks (Identification and Review)ar e progr essing satisfactorily vith several complete, See Attachment 1 for status of the various subtasks.Estimated start and completion dates are shown for those subtasks that are not yet completed.
Please note that our previous estimated completion dates for the EOPs in the DCRDR validation task (6)have slipped from November 1984 to December 28, 1984 due to events and/or circumstances as noted belov.The EOP delay will in turn affect the Phase III assessment task.Although we have started a preliminary assessment of the eristing information, an estimated completion date cannot be accurately predicted.
1
Mr.Harold R.Denton w2w AEP: N RC: 0773I In our'February 10, 1984 AEP:NRC:0773E letter we established a target date of December 1985 for the DCRDR Summary Report and iaplementation schedule., Because of the previously referred to series of events and/or circumstances, we now estimate that a December 1986 date is more realistic for the DCRDR Summary Report and implementation schedule.Due to these unanticipated events and to keep your staff apprised of our progress, we will provide you with an additional progress report during March 1985 and semi-annually thereafter until submission of the DCRDR Smuaary Report.The series of events and/or circumstances which will cause this delay are as follows: 1.The D.C.Cook Control Room Instrumentation
&Control Characteristics Identification
&Justification Documentation Program outlined in Attachment 2h of our August 6, 1980 AEP:NRC:0773H letter is in the process of being contracted to a consultant.
However, the additional work required-by the April 5, 1984 NRC letter/memorandum (Attachment 2 of our August 6, 1984 letter)will cause delays in the DCRDR validation task as well as the Phase III assessment task.The Instrumentation
&Control Characteristics Identification
&Justification Documentation Program, which is now part of the DCRDR Summary Report in accordance with that April 5, 1980 letter, will delay our submittal of the DCRDR Report.The extent of the delay has not been fully evaluated as of this date.2.The Appendix R canmitments which require plant procedure changes, and which must be integrated with the DCRDR Program, were inadequately estimated previously.
While the integration of the procedures is not anticipated, to cause great difficulty, the Appendix R changes, including the procedures, is not scheduled for implementation until late 1985.3.Recently, several D.C.Cook control room operators failed their annual requalification examinations.
As a result, a more intensified training program has been established for these operators which reduoes the staff of control room operators available to perform EOP verification and validation
'tasks.This additional training commitment was not anticipated and will also result in delaying the completion of our DCRDR planried schedule.Attachment 2 of this letter contains the entire EOP's Procedures Generation Package (PGP).In summary, the PGP contains the Writers Guide, and the Plant Specific Technical Guidelines, that were used in developing the D.C.cook EOPs.The PGP also contains the D..C.Cook EOP's Verification/Validation and Training Program descriptions which we believe will enable us to successfully validate, train, and implement our Upgraded Emergency Operating Procedures.
Mr.Harold R.Denton AEP: HRC: 0773I This document has been prepared following Corporate procedures which incorporate a reasonable set of controls to insure its accuracy and completeness prior to signature by the undersigned.
Very truly yours, P.exich Vice President 1 th At tachmen t cc: John E.Dolan W.G.Smith, Jr.-Bridgman R.C.Callen G.Charnoff E.R.Svanson, NRC Resident Inspector<<Bridgman 0
~pA Cgy 4 Wy C UNITED STATEs NVCI.FAR REGVI.ATORY COMMISSION WASHlkorOH, O.C.20555 DEC 3 1 N5 Docket Nos.: 50-315 and 50-316 Mr.John Dolan, Vice Pt'esfdent Indiana and Hichfgan Electric Company c/o Amet ican Electric Power Service Corporatfon 1 Riverside Pl'aza Columbus, Ohio 43216
Dear Mr.Dolan:
Subject:
Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737, Request for Hodfffcation of Cotttnfssion Ot'der Oated July 12, 1985 Re: Donald C.Cook Nuclear Plant, Unft Nos.1 and 2 The July 12, 1985, Order, established December 1985 completion dates for the Safety Parameter Ofsplay Systems (SPDS), the Emergency Operating Procedures (E'OPs), and the Emergency Response Facilities.
The December 1985 date cor-responded to.the planned 1985 Unit 2 outage for fuel reload, The Order also established December 1986 as a completion date for the Detailed Control Room Design Review, By letter dated Novembet.27,'985, the Indiana and Hichfgan-Electrfc Company reques'ted a modfffcatfon of the dates correspondfng to the 1985 refueling outage and provided new completion dates for the SPOS, EOPs, and the Emergency Response Facilities.
In July and August 1985, the Unit 2 experienced three unp1anned outages due to steam generator tube leaks.As a result of the steam generator repair outages, the refueling outage has been delayed until no later than February 28, 1986.The original completion date, December 1985, cor responded.to 1 month after the original planned refueling outage.Therefore, the new proposed completion date based on the February 1986~efueling date is March 1986.The one completion date of December 1986 for the Detailed Control Room Design Review remains unchanged.
In your earlier submittals, you based the completion schedules for the SPOS, COPs, and Emergencv Response Facilities on the implementation of the EOPs in Unit Nos.1 and 2 at the same time.The SPOS fs included fn the new EOPs and both are to be located in the Emergency Response Facflftfes.
For Unit 1, the implementation of the EOPs and SPOS fn March 1986 fs appropriate; however', since the SPDS in Unit 2 wfll not be requfred before startup following the refueling outage, we ag~ee that the SPOS completion date for Unit 2{and operability) may correspond to the stat'tup followfng the refuelfng.
The Emergency Response Facilities which are shared by both units are to be com-plete fn Ma~ch 1986 with the exception that the Unit 2 SPDS be installed and opef'atfonal as planned but at the startup followfng the Unit 2 refueling outage.A revised chart of the acceptable dates is enclosed.
4l Hr.John Dolan Hased on your submittals, which were addiessed above, we ffnd that you have shown good cause for the requested extensfons; that the extensions are in response to staff concerns or were otherwfse unavofdable; that the extensions appear reasonable; and that you have made a good fafth effort to comply with the schedule contafned fn the Cooefssfon's Order of July 12, 1985.Therefore, in accordance wfth the terms of Sectfon Y of the July 12, 1985, Commfssfon Order, we conclude that there fs adequate justfffcation for modfffcatfon of the Commission's Order and, hereby, grant the requested extensions.
Sincerely,
Enclosure:
Lfcensee's Addftfonal Comments on Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737 Thomas H.Novak, Acting Director Dfvfsfon of PMR Lfcensing-A, NRR cc: See next page
DONALD C.C00 NUCL'EAR PLANT LICDSEE'S ADDITIONAL COMMITMENTS ON SUPPLEMENT 1 TO NUREG-0737 TITLE 1.Safety Parameter Display System (SPDS)RE llIREMENTS lb.SPDS fully operational and operators trained LICENSEE'S COMPLETION SCHEDULE (OR STATUS)March 1986*2.Detailed Control Room Design 2b.Submit a su+nary report to the Revim (DCRDR)NRC including a proposed schedule for implementation.
December 1986 4.Upgr ade Emergency Operating 4b.Implement the upgraded EOPs Procedures (EOPs)Harch 1986 5.Fmergency Response Facilities 5a.Technical Support Center Ful ly Functional 5b.Operations Staging Area 5c.Emergency Response Facil ity Complete*Complete Complete**SPDS to be installed and operational March 1986 for Unit 1 and at the startvp follming the 1986 refueling outage for Unit 2.
~~APPENDIX H DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY AND CRITERIA~
HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY AND CRITERIA This section gives a detailed discussion of the methodology and criteria of the assessment process as discussed in the May 8, 1984 meeting with the NRC staff.~Fi ure 1 This simplified flow chart shows the CLO (Checklist Observation) in the Review Phase advancing to a HED (Human Engineering Discrepancy) in the Assessment Phase and on to a full or partial correction in the Implementation Phase of the DCRDR (Detailed Control Room Design Review).Westinghouse and ESSEX are contracted by AEP to perform the bulk of the DCRDR Review Phase work, including the CROPS (Control Room Operating Personnel Survey)interviews and questionnaires, the CRHFS (Control Room Human Factors Survey), the SRTA (System Function Review&Task Analysis)of selected Upgraded EOPs (Emergency Operating Procedures) to be used in the Verification of Task Performance Capabilities Review, and the Validation of Control Room Functions.
The primary output of the Westinghouse
-ESSEX Review Phase work are the CLOs which document the observed departures from the NUREG-0700 guidelines.
These CLOs of the Review Phase from Westinghouse
&ESSEX efforts are transferred to the Assessment Team in the Assessment Phase of the DCRDR Program.Those CLOs determined to be HED's by the AT then leave the DCRDR Program and go to AEPSC Engineering Design Study Process to identify HED corrections.
The product of the Design Study Process leave AEPSC Engg.and returns to the DCRDR-AT for the Fix Selection Process.Where the AT chooses full or partial fixes for implementation, the HED again leaves the DCRDR-AT and enters AEPSC Engineering during the Implementation Phase.In summary, the Simplified Flow Chart demonstrates that the CLO to HED conversion crosses corporation boundaries of Westinghouse and ESSEX to AEP, and within AEP will cross several boundaries, leaving and entering the DCRDR Program more than once.Later figures will show this process in more detail.
COOK OCROR SIMPLIF IEO FLOW CHART CLQ-HEO THROUGH ASSESSMENT tL IMPLEMENTAT I ON OCRCR-W 4 ESSEX DESIGN REVIEW TEAM o CHEQ<L I ST C6SERVAT I ON FORM REV I EW OCROR-AT o IDENTIFY 4 CATEGORIZE HED AEPSC ENGINEERING DESIGN STUDY PROCESS o IDENTIFY HED~RECT I ONS ASSESSMENT OCRQR-AT o SELECT FIX PROCESS NO OCRDR o JUSTIFY DOCUMENT PART OCROR o JUSTIFY 4 OOCUMENT'EPSG EAJG/A/EEL!hfG le QDlF lCATION EMHAN~~EPl T Cps%83GCS S ENGWCEk!NG (mgWZ~CVnrG gmleN~SHN CJIAVGCg PlcGCES S IMPLEMENTATION lf'050784 FIGURE I
~Fi ure 2 This figure is the first of several which explain the CLO/Review Phase to HED/Assessment
&Implementation Phase methodology and criteria in more detail.The Design Review Team (specifically, Westinghouse and ESSEX within the DRT)generates the Checklist Observation Forms for the Assessment Team.The AT identifies the CLO as a HED or sends it back to the DRT for a one time reassessment or explanation.
The probability of a CLO not being accepted as a HED is low, since the only criteria is for the AT to determine that the CLO has the potential to increase operator error.If so, the CLO becomes a HED.~Fi ure 3 The first step in the HED categorization process is to determine if it possesses a Safety Consequence.
The criteria for determining a Safety Consequence are shown on Figure 3.A"yes" answer to any one of the five criteria shown on Figure 3 constitutes a safety consequence.
The HED is then evaluated for High Probability of Operational, Error/Significant Deviation whose criteria is again shown on Figure 3.V
COOK DCRDR HED EVALUATI ON FLOW CHART'OG DESIGN REVIEW TEAH CHECKLIST OBSERVATION FORHS ASSESSHEN7 TEAH LOG HP%N ENG INEERIN8 DISCREPANCIES EVALUATE FOR SAFETY CONSEOUENCE NO HIGH PROBABILITY OF OPERAT I ONAL ERRCR/'IGNIFICANT DEVIATION ASSESS FOR S I GNIFI CANT OPERATIONAL IHPACT NO CATEGORY l REfER TO F IG.3 CATEGORY 2 REFER TO F 18.3 CATEGORY 3 REFER TO F IG.3 REASONABLE COST VS.OPERATOR BENEf IT IDENTIFY I L 1DENT IFY CORRECTIONS COST TO FIX SELECT FIX AEPSC ENGINEERING DESIGN STU3Y DETERHI NE CUHULATI VE EFFECT CATEGORY 4 REFER TO FIG.3 LOG ASSESS FOR NEV DEPARTURES FROH hlJREG-0700 ASSESS FOR EXTENT OF CORRECTION YES PART DOCUHENT JUST IF ICATION SCHEDULE IHPLEHENTATI ON AhG OOCUHENT I AEPSC ENGINEERING DESIGN STLGY JUSTIFY AM3 DOCUHENT SCHEDULE IHPI EHENTATI ON AND OOCUHENT L FIGLRE 2.4
HED CATEGORY GU 1 DEL l NKS CHECKLIST GBSERVATIONS FROM REVIEV PROCESS HED ASSESSMENT HAS POTENTIAL FOR INCREASING
%%RATGR ERROR ASSESSMENT CR I TERIA CATEGORY ASSESSMENT FACTGR I~EMEHTATI GN (RATING)SAFETY COt4SEOUEHCE s o ASSOCIATED VITH SAFETY FlWCTIGN HECESSARY TO SHJT 004tH PLANT o CmLO LEAD TO V10LATION OF TECH, SPECS.o At4Y Fl+ICTIGN NECESSARY TO HITI BATE THE CONSEQUENCES OF AN ACCIDENT o HOH-SAFETY FUNCTION THAT AFFECTS SAFETY 06 JECTIVES o LEADS TO TRANSIENTS THAT UNNECESSARILY TEST GR EXERCISE THE SAFETY FQ4CTIGNS EARLIEST GPPGRTlP41TY
(~ATGRY)HEDS II.III HIGH PROBABILITY OF OPERATIONAL ERRCR/SIGNIFICANT DEVIATION>
o OOKHEHTED GPERATOR ERRGR o EXTENT OR DEGREE OF DEVIATION FRGH t4JREG-0700 SAFETY CCNSEOUEHCE NOT POTENTIAL HIGH PROBABILITY OF OPERATOR ERR HOT LARGE DEVIATION FROM MJREG-0700 LOW PROBABILITY OF SAFETY CGNSEOUEHCE SIGNIFICANT OPERATIONAL If%'ACT o AFFECTS OPERATOR EFFIC1EHCY o AFFECTS OPERATGR PERFORMANCE o AFFECTS PLANT PERFORMAHCE o AFFECTS PLANT AVAILABILITY o AFFECTS OPERABILITY.
IHCLUOIHG MAINTENANCE COSTS REASCNABLE COST VS.OPERATCR BEHEF IT EARLIEST GPPORTlW I TY (NEXT HIGHEST PRIGRI TY)CCNVEHI ENT SCRZllJZ)OUTAGE DOCUMENT INSIGNIFICANT PROBABILITY OF ERRGR HO SAFETY CGNSEOUEHCE OPERATICNAL IMPACT NOT SIGNIFICANT HAY IMPROVE OPERATOR MORALE CAT IV RECOMMEND CORRECT I ON MAY CR MAY NOT BE REGUIRED ANALYSIS FOR CORRECTION F I auRE High Probability of Operational Error is defined as a documented operator error from past operating history such a LER's, technical specification violation reports, operator interview, questionnaires, etc.Significant Deviation relates to the extent or.degree of deviation from the NUREG-0700 guidelines and is a noticeable or measured large amount or considered to be important.
If a HED has any one of the five safety consequence criteria, and documentation shows it has caused operator error in the past or its deviation from the NUREG-0700 Guidelines is significant, then the HED is Category l.As shown on Figure 3, it is mandatory to implement a correction at the earliest opportunity that the engineering design, expedited cost scoping, review, approval and material delivery can be achieved coinciding with a scheduled outage, where necessary.
If a HED possesses a safety consequence, but no past operator error is documented and its deviation of NUREG-0700 is not significant, it becomes a Category 2.Category 2, as shown on Figure 3y.must have its correction implemented at the earliest opportunity after thorough and complete engineering analysis, design, review, approval, cost evaluation and study, and material acquisition contingent with a scheduled unit outage, where necessary.
Category 3 and 4 HEDs have no'r insignificant safety consequence.
None of the five safety criteria are affected by these HEDs.These HEDs would then be evaluated for Significant Operational Impact.The criteria for significant Operational Impact are shown on Figure 3.Even though the HED has no or low probability of safety consequence, if it possesses-any of the five Operational Impact criteria in a'ignificant amount, it is categorized as Category 3 and will be scheduled for implementation during a convenient scheduled unit outage.Even if the HED possesses no operational impact of significance, it will be evaluated for being of some operator benefit and if this benefit'can be implemented at a reasonable cost, it is also categorized Category 3.Those HEDs that possess insignificant safety consequence, insignificant operational impact and operator benefit cannot be achieved except at a high cost, will be further analyzed for any effect they may have on any other HED.Should it be determined that this effect is cumulative, or tends to, upgrade the category of this or any other HED, these HEDs will be routed back through the entire categorization process.It is possible, therefore, that this HED which by itself is a lowly Category 4, can through cumulative effect become part of a Category I, 2, or 3 HED.Those HEDs that are left become Category 4.They would contain no safety consequence and insignificant probability error.But because they may have some aesthetic value or could affect operator morale, they will be further assessed for possible implementation, even though implementation is not required.
In summary, if a CLO is assessed to have the potential for increasing operator error, it becomes a HED.If a HED involves a safety consequence, it becomes a Category I or 2, the two highest implementation ratings.Past documented errors or a significant deviation from NUREG-0700 Guidelines with a safety consequence is Category l.A HED that possesses insignificant probability of a safety consequence is categorized 3 or 4.Anything that has a significant effect on operator or plant performance and efficiency is Category 3.If some operator benefit can be visualized at a reasonable cost then it is also categorized 3.Category 3 HEDs will be implemented during convenient scheduled outages.Even though a HED possess no significant effect on the reactor or balance or plant, and is not associated with a significant probability of operator error, it may still be chosen for implementation for no other reason than it may raise operator morale.~Fi ure 4 The Category I, 2, or 3 HEO is chosen for correction by the Assessment Team.The DCRDR Lead Engineer will then assign a DRT member the responsibility of getting an AEPSC Engg.Design Study to identify corrections and/or propose fixes.The DRT member will assign the HED to an appropriate AEPSC Engg.Division and Section.The majority of all HED corrections will rest primarily with the Mechanical Engg.Division, Instrumentation 5.Control Section or the Electrical Engg.Division, Electrical Generation Section.The DRT member will also develop a schedule for completion of the design study based upon HED category and unit outage schedules.
The ORT member sends the HED to the appropriate Section Manager who assigns a Section Lead Engineer to review the HEO and the NUREG-0700 Guidelines propose fixes, examine the proposals for new departures from the guidelines and determine costs of each proposal.Depending on unit outage schedules, Category I HEO costs may only be scoped in an expedited manner to speed up the process.The Section Manager sends the approved Design Study results back to the DRT member who reviews/approves the fixes/costs and looks for new departures.
The DRT member determines the strengths and weaknesses of each proposal, that the proposal provides the necessary correction, and on any new NUREG-0700 Guidelines departures.
The DRT member sends the Design Study-HED packet to the OCROR Lead Engineer who submits it to the PRT.The Project REview Team reviews/approves the Design Study and the ORT member comments for submittal to the Assessment Team.
CI COOK DCRDR HED FIX PROPOSALS THROUGH DESIGN STUDY CATEGORY I, II, III HED FROH ASSES&TNT TEAM OCRDR LEAD ENGlNEER o ASSIGN DESIGN REVIEW TEAH M&GER OCROR LEAD ENGINEER o LOG o SUBMIT TO PRT ORT HEHBER o ASSIGN TO R4GINEERING WITH SCHEDLLE PROJECT REVIEW TEAM o Rc~I EW/APPROVE/'ALIDATE PROPOSED FIXES ANO COHHENTS SECTION XANAGER o ASSIGN ENGINEER FOR DESIGN STUDY TO ASSESSMENT TEAM SECTION LEAD ENGINEER o REVIEW HED o PROPOSE FIXES o DETERMINE COSTS o EXAMINE fOR NEW DEPARTURES SECTION LEAD ENGINEER o REVIEW HED o PROPOSE FIXES o EXPEDITED COST SCOPE o EXAHINE FOR NEW OEPAR~ES SECTION HANAGER o REVIEW/APPROVE PROPOSED F IXES CRT MEMBER o REV I EW/APPROVE/COMMENT ON PROPOSED FIXES FIGURE 4.
~Fi ure 5 The next step after identifying fixes is for the Assessment Team to select a fix.The AT analyzes any enhancement fix proposal first.They verify the enhancement proposal will provide the necessary correction and will not interfere with other future corrections.
If it passes this assessment it will be implemented on a timely schedule.If no enhancement fixes are proposed or acceptable, the AT selects the preferred design alternative, verifying that the necessary correction is achieved and the method, references, materials, schedules, costs, etc.are acceptable.
It validates the design with drawings, sketches, photographs, models, sample, mock-ups or actual control room visitation.
The next step is the AT assessment for new departures from the NUREG-0700 Guidelines by reviewing the fix, the DRT member comments and the guidelines criterion.
The next step is the AT assessment of the extent of correction to determine that the fix will be a full or partial fix, or no fix will be implemented.
Full and partial fixes that require control board modification enter.the AEPSC Engg.RFC Process for engineering design change.This process is outlined on Figure 6.~Fi ure 6 As can be seen in this figure there are numerous steps and working groups involved in this procedure.
To summarize, a RFC Lead Eng.i's appointed, generally the same individual/section that was responsible for the original Design Study.The RFC Lead Eng.is the primary responsible individual who follows the RFC from inception to closeout.The RFC Process involves correction, design conception and/or refinement, supervisory/management (both in AEPSC and Plant)review/approval process, AEPSC Design Division design work and drawing revision, required word document revisions by responsible sections, independent safety review/approvals, final cost estimates, procurement of materials, installation scheduling and coordination, inspection and testing, quality assurance review and documentation control.There are several levels of review/approval process involved, as shown on Figure 6.Once approved it passes from the RFC Lead Engineer through the Design Division to the Plant for implementation and closeout.This is an in place system and procedure for Cook plant revisions and additions.
COOK DCROR SELECT FIX PROCESS PROJECT REVIEV TEAM o REV I EW/APPROVE'ALIDATE PROPOSED FIXES AND C~ENTS ASSESSMENT TEAM o ANALYSIS OF ENHANCEMENT F I X ASSESSMENT TEAM o VERIFY DESIGN ASSESSHENT TEAM o SELECT PREFERRED DESIGN ALTERNATIVE o VERIFY DESIGN o VALIDATE DESIGN ASSESSMENT TEAM o ASSESS FOR HEV OEPARTLRES FROM hNEG-0700 FIGURE
COOK OCROR FLOW HEDS THROUGH RFC REVIEW-APPROVAL HEDS APPROVED f'R IHPLEHENTATI ON DCROR PROGRAM LEAD ENGINEER COGNIZANT CHANGE CONTROL BOARD HEHBER EXPEDITE PATH RFC LEAD ENGINEER COST ESTIMATE, OTHER INVOLVED GRCKA S'&PUTS TEHPORARY WAIVER LETTER RFC LEAD ENGINEER SUPERVISOR/'SECT I ON MANAGER REVIEW FIRE PROTECTION REVIEW, IF REQUIRED RFC LEAD ENGINEER SECTION HANAGER RFC LEAD ENGINEER DIVISION HANAGEHENT REVIEW PLANT MANAGER REVIEW RFC LEAD ENGIhKER DIVISION HANAGER NSQ ENGINEER INDEPENDENT SAFETY REVIEW D.C.COOK PLANT PLAYTHING SUPER INTEhOENT HSING SECTION HANAGER NSC SECTION HANAGER INDEPENDENT SAFETY REV IEW APPROVAL CHANGE CONTROL BOARD SECTR NUCLEAR ENGINEERING VICE PRESIDENT 0~C.COOK PLANT PLANNING SUPER INTEMIENT CHANGE CONTROL BOARD REV IEW RFC LEAD ENG I NEER O.C.COOK PLANT NUCLEAR SAFETY REVIEW COl+LI TTEE TO I~EHENTATI ON ANO CLOSEOUT F IGLRE Q~11
~Fi ure 7 The CLO from the Review Phase to the HED through the Assessment and Implementation Phase is a relatively complex operation which can span a considerable time period and can involve numerous HEDs.Clearly, a HED Tracking method is required.This simplified flow chart shows two tracking methods.First, the DCRDR-HED Log will be the responsibility of the DCRDR Lead Eng.and will be used by the Assessment TEam and the DCRDR Program Administrator to determine HED and corrective action disposition.
All CLO's received from Westinghouse and ESSEX will be logged.When identified as a HED it will be logged.Final rejection of a CLO will be logged and no further entries required.The conclusion of the Design Study Process will be logged.The corrective action selection of the AT will be logged.This includes enhancement modification or no fix corrective action.The No Fix selection would closeout the DCRDR-HED Log entries.When a modification fix requiring the RFC process is approved, the Action Item Tracking (AIT)process is initiated.
The AIT process is an in-place company procedure for action items, in particular, commitments are monitored by AEP management.
It is also monitored by the AEPSC guality Assurance group for past due commitment dates.There is an in place AEPSC RFC Status Summary Report Process which generates periodic status reports to further enhance our ability to keep track of HEDs.12 COOK OCRDR SIMPLIFlED FLOW CHART HED 1 RACKING SYSTEM CLO OCRQR o IOENTIFY ANO CATEGORIZE HEQ o INITIATE OESI GN STAY AEPSC ENGINEERING o OESIGN STUOY PROCESS OCRDR o SELECT FIX PROCESS AEPSC ENGINEERING o RFC PROCESS OCROR o HED LOG ACTION ITEM TRACK ING PROCESS AEPCS ENGINEERING o RFC STATUS S~~Y REPORT PROCESS F I GLRE 7.13' APPENDIX I DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 CONTROL ROOM OPERATOR QUESTIONNAIRE FOR THE COLUMBUS MOCKUP 0,
COOK DCRDR PROGRAM CONTROL ROOM OPERATOR QUESTIONNAIRE FOR COLUMBUS MOCKUP Cook DCRDR Cook Control Room Mockup Operator guestionaire Several enhancements/minor modifications have been simulated on the NESW, ESW, CCW, SPY, SIS and RHR Panels.Your comments and suggestions are needed to determine the benefits to the control room operator and to finalize the design.Please answer the following questions.
Comment where you wish.Please answer the questions considering other factors besides your own personal opinion.For example, even though you may be an experienced operator thorough'y familiar w.th the Cook main control room panels, would the enhancement help a newer operator?W'll it help under high stress conditions, such as emergency operating conditions?
Please read all of the questions before answering first question.Answer questions with asterix first, then those questions you feel most important.
Try to answer as many questions as time allows.You are encouraged to write comments on any aspect of a question you desire.(dd)
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire Veschler Indicators The scale graduations and numerals will be black on a white background.
This allows operating zone coding with transparent red, yellow and green tape.The flow, pressure and level indicators will be color coded on the noun name portion of the scale.1.Does the color coding scheme help you find and recognize the indicators more easily?Yes Nc Uncertain Comments: la.We are considering adding a fourth color code for the horizontal flux indicators, to help distinquish them from the horizontal temperature indicators, which are white.Would this be worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 2.Is it easier to read values from the white and black scales graduations and numerals, particularly when compared to old dark red flow indicators?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: Where applicable, system/subsystem hierarchial labels have been used with the edgewise indicators.
This reduces the number of words required vertically on the vertical indicators.
Digger characters can be employed.Is it easier to read noun names?Yes No Uncertain Comments:
+/w 3a~Look at the vertical indicators on the ESW Panel.Note the top label"HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW", and the next lower labels"DIESEL GEN","CNTMT SPRAY","CCW COOLER" and"CONT RH AC", now notice all that is on the vertical indicator scales now is"DGIAB, DGICD, EAST and WEST".Does this present any problem to you in determining that, for example, WFI-715 is ESW flow to the west containment spray heat exchanger?
Yes No Uncertain Comments:+ii 3b.On panels where heirarchial labeling has been done, is it obvious as to which devices the labels apply?Yes No Uncertain Comments: 4.Operating zone coding color bands are shown on applicable indicators.
The red and yellow zone coding criteria is the same as the first and second priority coding for the annunciators, see attached criteria.Are these Operating Zone color coded bands on indicators useful information?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 4a.On the electrical meters for motor amps, the third color orange is employed.The narrow orange band designates a precautionary operating zone above 115%motor nameplate rating, while the wider band shows motor overload protective relay settings.1)Is this useful?Yes No Uncertain 2)Does the orange color help separate the higher priority red and yellow zones from electrical equipment protection zones?Yes Nc Uncertain Comments:
4b.Ammeters associated with pumps could also employ a orange band on the low end of the scale.This band would run from zero to 40 or 50 percent of the full load name plate rating value, and would represent a pump not delivering flow to the system (unloaded).
Would you consider this useful?Yes No Uncertain Comments: 5.Overall, do you consider the Weschler indicator enhancements beneficial' Yes No Uncertain Comments: 6.is it beneficial to use the same color code on the Bailey indicators?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 7.Certain indicators are shown with a live zero so that you might recognize either indicator or input failure more readily.These indicators would normally indicate zero during normal service, but would come into service during emergency conditions.
Hopefully, you would recognize a failure before the meter was required for service.Look at XFI-51 thru 54.Would you be able to readily spot the pointer at the bottom of one of these indicators, versus at zero scale?Yes No Uncertain Comments:
8a In order to reduce the number of words written vertically on these indicators, the words FLOW, PRESS, LEVEL have been eliminated.
The Mark No.tag, units of measure such as PSIG and GPM, and the color code all signify type of indication.
Is this satisfactory?
Yes No Uncartain Comments: 9.Do the large dial indicators at the top of the Panels need the pressure color code shown on the iNESW Panel?Yes No Uncertain Comments:
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire Hierarchial Labels&Lines 1.Recently the Hain Control Room boards had panel boundary lines and labels installed.
Since the panel equipment is generally arranged by system function and sequence of operation, these large panel name labels describe a system function.Is this beneficial in helping you find control panel equipment?
Yes No Uncertain Comments+/2e In addition to the above labels and boundary lines, we are considering further subdividing the panels and labeling.Please read the attached rules for hierarchial labeling.Look at the examples on panels NESW thru Rk!R.Note the effect on component nameplates.
Please answer the following questions on a per panel basis.a~Overall, is the hierarchial labeling scheme beneficial in locating or finding individual pieces of equipment?
NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESV: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments
(a.con')SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments+b.Overall, does the panel now look more congested or too"busy"?NESW: Yes No Uncerta'n Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments
Does the system/subsystem lines within the panel boundary lines help you visualize/associate common/shared functions among the controls and displays?Yes No Uncertain Comments The component nameplates don't repeat words in the higher level subsystem/system labels.Does this improve your ability to determine the function of an individual piece of equipment?
NESW: Yes.No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments'CW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments Are the hierarchial labels associated with the edgewise indicators beneficial?
NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments Stand at the middle of the room, look at the component labels.In many cases, they have fewer words than present labels.In conjunction with the larger system/subsystem labels, can you find individual components more easily?NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments
(f con')ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncerta n Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments Stand at arms length from each panel.Can you readi'y identify each control switch function, even though you may have to read more than one label?NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ii (g con't)SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments h.Note that some pump control switch nameplates contain only the motor breaker tiark No.Is this satisfactory?
NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments
SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments Do you recommend hierarchial labelinp and demarcation lines for this panel?NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SlS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments
On RHR Panel the system/subsystem lines are shown with champhered corners or junctions.
This cakes more time to install on panels?Is this feature worthwhile compared to the square corners/junctions shown on other panels?NESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments ESW: Yes No Uncertain Comments CCW: Yes No Uncertain Comments SPY: Yes No Uncertain Comments SIS: Yes No Uncertain Comments RHR: Yes No Uncertain Comments K.Xerox copies of the control panel front views are provided for your use if you have suggestions as to the system/subsystem demarcation lines or.hierarchial labels.
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire Annunciator Enhancements l.Only three lines of text are used on the new engraved tiles to reduce congestion and improve readability.
Is this beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments Note the old drop labeled"ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL VOLTAGE FAILURE" is now labeled"ANNUNCIATOR VOLTAGE AVAILABLE" because this drop is normally lit.Does this help improve your recognition or understanding of what this window means when lit or out?Yes No Uncertain Comments 3.Color coded filters are shown to represent alarm priority.See attached annunciator priority coding criteria.Do these color coded annunciator drops help improve ready recognition of high priority alarms?Yes No Uncertain Comments
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire Status/Monitor Lights Engraving l.Only three lines of text are used on the new engraved tiles.The largest, boldest characters that will fi.t are used (they are slightly larger than what is used on the annunciators).
Is this beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 2.The proposed character size in combination with only three.lines of text means the windows no longer have room for the red triangles.
Note the proposed black borders around the tiles to replace the red.triangle coding.Any problem with this method?Yes No Uncertain Comments: 3.The red triangles have to be replaced because they are red.At the very least, we would have made them black.Does slightly bigger lettering to make the writing easier to read worthwhile enough to offset the extra trouble of the black borders for coding?Yes No Uncertain Comments:
Cook DCRDR Operator guestionaire H/A Station Enhancements The Foxboro stations have several enhancements; new Mark No.and Noun Name Labels, new open, close and knob rotation stickers.l.Are the Open, Close stickers beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 2.Are the Inc Set Point or Open Valve stickers beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 3.The Bailey Stations on the Condensate Panel also have similar enhancements.
Is this beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 4.~Overall, how do the stickers and labels look?Bad Good Uncertain Comments:
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire Engraved White Lamp Caps l.All unlabeled white lamp caps that cannot be labeled e..ternally, will get a new engraved cap.The engraving will describe what the lamp represents when lit.Does the engraving help you determine the function?Yes No Uncertain Comments: 2.The fire detector lamps at the top of the EF Panel presently have dymotape labels.We plan on replacing with engraved white lamp caps and external labels.Please review this on Mockup.Comments:
Cook DCRDR Operator Questionaire General Questions+1~Foxboro Stations for IRV-310&320 are used primarily to control RHR flow during cooldowns, yet they are located on the Containment Spray Panel.One of the modifications being considered is to relocate these stations to the RHR, where the flow and temperature indication and alarms are.Do you consider this worthwhile?
See SPY-RHR Panel drawing and change description.
Yes No Uncertain Comments: On the DTU Panel, the RCS wide range TH and TC recorders are arranged Loop 1 top left, Loop 2 top right, Loop 3 bottom left, Loop 4 bottom right.The T and Tavg indicators at the top of the panel are arranged differently, Loop 1 top left, Loop 3 top right, Loop 2 bottom left, Loop 4 bottom right.One of the modifications being considered is to interchange the Loop 2 and 3'&Tavg indicators to make their arrangement the same as the recorders.
Do you consider this worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: i li'The Steam Generation Panel is being considered for extensive rearrangement.
Basically, the TDAFP control switches for FM0-211,221, 231&241 would be moved to the present locations for control switches MRV-210,220,230
&240.The MRV control switches would move straight down the panels to the old FMO elevation.
Control switches for the feedwater isolation valves FMO 201 and 202 would be interchanged, and FMO-203 with 204.This basically lines up all equipment for each steam generator in vertical groups.The No.1 MDAFP controls in the middle of the panel would be moved to where the TDAFP controls are now on the left side of the panel, and arranged similar to the No.2 MDAFP controls on the right side of the panel.This gives six vertical groups of equipment, the two outside groups alike, the four inside groups alike.The seventh group, the oddball, the TDAFP controls, are put in the middle where the No.1 MDAFP controls vacated.See SG Panel Mod drawing and change description.
The controls rearrangement has been simulated on the Mockup.Please examine the simulated arrangement and answer the following questions:
+Is this arrangement an improvement for operation of the aux feedpumps and valves during emergency conditions?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: il/Is this arrangement satisfactory during normal operation, including startups?Yes No Uncertain Comments:+Do you consider this rearrangement of equipment so extensive that you would have difficulty learning the new configuration?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: gtl Overall, do you consider this modification worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: 4.There are four control switches on the VS Panel that control two fans apiece.Refer to the attached sketch for details.Note the advantage of the proposed switch position configur'ation.
Do you consider this worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments:
,,
The control switches for the E&W feedpump emergency leakoff valves FRV-252&254 are wired such that turning the switch clockwise has the opposite effect of all other control switches in the control room.That is, it goes from OPEN to AUTO to CLOSE in the clockwise direction.
These switches are being considered for rewire to get CLOSE to AUTO to OPEN in the clockwise direction.
Do you consider this worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: The valve test control switch positions and position indicators for the Unit 1 E&W feedpump turbines are not arranged in the same sequence.That is, if you throw the switch to the left to test the valve, the indicator on the right moves.Vice versa when you throw the switch to the right.We are considering interchanging the left and right hand indicators.
Do you consider this worthwhile?
Yes No Uncertain Comments: The IV Panel has several control switch arrangement problems.The EOP Attachment A&B to E-0 has been revised to be more compatible with the panel arrangement.
A set of status lights being considered for this panel showing Phase A and B Isolation Valves.One of the proposals being considered is to add status lights for the valves that are not located on the IV Panel.That way, all isolation valves are indicated on the IV Panel, either by status lights or the red and green indicating lamps associated with the control switches.The status lights would be wired in such a way as to be de-energized unless a Phase A or B Isolation signal were present.In order for the operator to quickly assess the red and green indicating lamps associated with the control switches on the IV Panel, the operator would start at the top left hand control switch and go straight down the vertical row of switches, left to right, looking only for the small labels with A above the indicating lamp during Phase A Isolation, and B during Phase B Isolation.
At each A label, he merely verifies that lamp is on, the opposite lamp is off.Because the operator is not reading labels or looking for particular valves, he can quickly go through all of the indicating lamp sets on the IV Panel, if all of the valves are stroked to the proper position.If, however, a valve did not fully stroke, the operator would stop at that contxol switch and manually throw the switch to close the valve.If that works, he continues on as before.If that does not work, we propose the attachment A and B valve lists show the opposite safety S Qi train valve on the same line with a grid coordinate number.A drawing would be added to Attachment A and B showing what each row and column of switches are designated for the grid coordinates.
The operator then has a ready reference to enable him to find sister valves quickly.He verifies the sister valve has stroked.If so, he continues on with the process until all the IV Panel is canvassed.
He notes the valve or valves that are not fully stroked, and initiates local operator action if applicable.
The point is, the valve closed-open lamps can be quickly and reliably canvassed using the A and B labels only, and the valves not on IV Panel would have status lights on the IV Panel.Do you think this is a practical method for you to use?Yes No Uncertain Comments: 8.Is it worthwhile, or even detrimental, to demarcate and hierarchial label the present arrangements on panels SPY, RHR and SG when we.plan on rearranging them within three years?Worthwhile Not Worthwhile Uncertain Comments: 9.Any comment or suggestion suggestion you may wish to make on any of the following, please do so: Safety Train Tape Panel Labels/Lines 3 Electrical Mimic Lines Engraved White Lamp Caps H/A Station Stickers/Labels Control Room Rug Recorder Labels Control Switch Handle CoLor/Shape Codes Annunciator Windows'Status/Monitor Lights Operating Zone Coding
RG 1.97 Stickers indicators Other Q 10.In your opinion, which of the enhancements or modifications simulated on the Mockup or discussed in the Questionaire would be the most useful and helpful to the control room operator.List as many as you like, particularily if you feel they have cumulative effects with each other.Most beneficial Beneficial Least beneficial (GENERAL QUESTIONS-3)'
~ll.Examine Mockup panels from the Reactor Coolant Pumps around to the Turbine Auxiliaries Panel.System/subsystem labels and demarcation lines have been simulated.
Although the component nameplates have not been simulated yet, the non-repetition of words already in the system/subsystem labels, similiar to that shown on the NESW thru RHR Panels, would be followed where applicable.
Please comment on a panel by panel basis on demarcation lines grouping of equipment and the system/subsystem names used on the labels.If you wish to rearrange the equipment groupings (demarcation lines)and change names, etc, a drawing is provided for you to mark up as you please.ill Reac tor Coolant Pumps Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are sys tern/subsys tem labels s at is fac tory?(c)Any Suggestions?
I ,-Pressurizer Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
~Flux/Rod Control Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
Delta Temp/Steam Dump/Unit Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
+, Steam Generator/Aux Feedwater Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?
(c)Any Suggestions?
+hain Feedpumps Panel I (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels sat-'sfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
g~-Condensate Pumps/Heater Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels sat-'sfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
~f Feedwater Heater/YiSR Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?
(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
+Turbine Auxiliaries Panel (a)Are groupings (demarc lines)satisfactory?(b)Are system/subsystem labels satisfactory?(c)Any Suggestions?
0
+~12.Examine the proposed VS Panel modification drawings.Would these changes be beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Comments
NRV-152&153 controls on Pressurizer Panel each have two sets of switches.One is the control switch with Close, Auto, Open positions, the second switch.is the Cold Overpressure selectro switch with Block-Unblock positions.
The selector switch is mounted low on the panel where there is concern for accidental operation.
Also, recent panel revisions have placed these switches immediately below electrical meters, where thereis concern for mistaken operation (it looks like its part of heater controls).
The function of both the control switch and selector switch can be incorporated into the control switch only.See attached description.
Do you think this would be beneficial?
Yes No Uncertain Would accidental or mistaken operation possibilities be reduced?Yes No Uncertain Can you think of any condition where you would need the present two switch control configurations over the single switch proposal?Yes No Uncertain Comments
,
K 14.One of the modifications being considered for annunciators is to rearrange them to correspond to the relative location of related controls and displays, where applicable.
For example, if the East Motor Driven Aux Feedpump controls/displays were to the left of the Turbine Driven Aux Feedpump controls/displays, so should its annunciator drops be to the left.Do you consider this important or beneficial?
Important Beneficial Not Necessary Comments+i: 15.One of the modifications being considered for the ECCS'Monitor Lights is to rearrange them to correspond to the arrangement of the control switches where applicable.
That is, if a particular valves control switch is to the left or above another valves control switch, the moni.tor light will be to the left or above, etc.Do you consider this important or beneficial?
Important Beneficial Not Necessary Comments
Station Auxiliar Panel 1.The SA Panel has been demarcated into three section: Diesel Generator 1AB, Auxiliary Buses, and Diesel Generator 1CD.Do you find this helpful?Yes No Uncertain Comments 2.The left half of the SA Panel has been labeled using hierarchial labeling criteria.The right half was labeled using standard component labels.a.Overall, is the hierarchial labeling beneficial in locating or finding individual pieces'of equipment?
Yes No Uncertain Comments b.Overall, does the panel now look more congested or too If b us y II?Yes No Uncertain Comments c.Do you find hierarchial labeling of the panel meters helpful?Yes No Uncertain Comments d.Mould it be confusing to use hierarchial labeling on the panel meters and components labels on control switches.Yes No Uncertain Comments
5.Recently new mimic lines were installed on the SA Panels at Cook Plant.The new mimic lines are all one color, black, with voltage designations printed on the lines to enable the operators to distinguish between different bus voltages.a.Are the new mimic lines easy to follow.Yes No Uncertain Comments b.Throughout each control room there are as many as six (6)different voltage levels shown on mimic lines.The old mimic lines used a color code scheme to distinguish between the different voltage levels.Due to the number of colors needed to distinguish between the different voltage levels it was thought confusion could occur over which color meant which voltage.Are the new mimic lines less confusing.
Yes No Uncertain Comments 4.Any general comments concerning the SA Panel.a.Hierarchial labeling of the entire panel.Comments b.Partial Hierarchial labeling-Hierarchial labeling of panel meters, component labeling of controls on other information.
Comments c.Mimic lines Comments d.Anything in general concerning the SA Panel.Comments 56.4
COOK DCRDR PROGRAM CONTROL ROOM OPERATOR QUESTIONNAIRE ATTACHMENTS
Operating Zone Coding Criteria Revision: 1 Date:6/3/86 1.Red Zone A.B.C.D.E.F.G.Plant Shutdown Reactor Trip Hain Turbine Trip, F.P.T.Trip Radiation Release Plant conditions which, if not corrected immediately, will result in automatic shutdown or radiation release or will require manual plant shutdown.Fire Alarm Diesel Generator Emergency'ower Bus (NRC Requirement)
Any alarm condition that would not allow the Diesel Generators to operate or deliver required power to their Respective Busses.II.Yellow Zone B.C.Plant condition which, if not corrected, may lead to a plant shutdown or radiation release.Forewarning of or can lead to a first priority alarm condition.
Technical Specification related, may require plant shutdown or curtailment, may require verification or testing of equipment, data acquisitioning and logging.III.Green Zone Limited application, normally associated with a parameter that is controlled automatically at a constant set point.Band is only wide enough to show normal variations from set point, width not to exceed 10%of absolute value of set point.IV.Oran e Zone (Electrical Meters)A.Wide Orange Zone represents values where electrical protection logic will tripout equipment.
Includes overload current protection, which is a time delay function.B.Narro~Orange Zone represents values where equipment precautionary measures should be taken and the equipment should not be operated at unless necessary.~
(2-dd)
Annunciator Priority Coding Criteria Revision: 2 Date: 6/3/86 1.First Priorit Red (Pink)Lens Color A.B.C.D.E.F.G.Plant Shutdown Reactor Trip Main Turbine Trip, F.P.T.Trip Radiation Release Plant conditions which, if not corrected immediately, will result in automatic shutdown or radiation release or will require manual plant shutdown.Fire Alarm Diesel Generator Emergency Power Bus (NRC Requirement)
Any alarm condition that would not allow the Diesel Generators to operate or deliver required po~er to their Respective Busses.II.Second Priorit Yellow (Amber)Lens Color B.C.Plant condition which, if not corrected, may lead to a plant shutdown or radiation release.Forewarning of or can lead to a first priority alarm condition.
Technical Specification related, may require plant shutdown or curtailment, may require verification or testing of equipment, data acquisitioning and logging.III.Third Priorit White Lens Color A.B.Plant conditions representing problems&system degradation which affect plant operability but which should not lead to plant shutdown, radiation release, or violation of Technical Specifications.
Information that is useful to the operator but may or may not require operator response, depending on equipment status.
COOK DCRDR Hierarchial Labelin Criteria Hierarchial Labeling will be employed when: (1)Ma)ority of controls within a individual panel boundary lines can be outlined with orderly system/subsystem demarcation lines.(2)The system/subsystem labels can be located without interference in a prominent place in the middle top half of the group.(3)All labels required to identify the most familiar noun name or function description of a component can be read by the operator without head movement at arms distance from the component.
This includes all components within the group.(4)The addition of the system/subsystem demarcation lines and labels shall not significantly increase the visual clutter of the panel.~<<'4 (5)Operators consider the system/subsystem demarcation and labeling on a panel beneficial The reasoning behind the above criteria are dictated by the nature of the vertical panels in the Cook control rooms.While all panel, system, subsystem and component nameplates can be read easily from the center of the room (6 to 13 feet distance from panel)without head movement, at arms distance it cannot be done on several panels.That is, you cannot read a component nameplate that is 34 inches above the floor from arms distance, and read a system/subsystem label that is above 5 feet 6 inches from the floor, much less a panel label that is 8 feet plus above floor, without head movement.Head movement can cause an operator to lose his place, or increase the potential for operator error, or at least cause undue delay while the operator finds the required panel component again.While hierarchial labeling would be adequate while standing or approaching the panel from 6 to 13 feet away, the operator must verify he is on the correct control after reaching the component on the panel before actuating said control.This verification would be more difficult if the operator must look at a panel nameplate 8 feet plus above floor, then a system/subsystem label 4 to 7 feet above floor, then the component label 24 inches above floor.:0 Further, the operator may have to actuate multiple controls on the same panel, which may cross system/subsystem boundaries.
While working at a given panel, he should not be required to read multiple labels separated by appreciable distances to verify a single components identity.
Hierarchial labeling, that is, lower level labels do not repeat information from higher level labels, can be applied to groups in the upper regions of the panel where the panel name is necessary to determine the components function;or to groups lower on the panel where the system/subsystem label is in close proximity to the component label, and the panel label contents are not necessary in the component function description.
Where the above criteria cannot be met, modified hierarchial labeling will be applied, if it meets all above criteria except (3).Modified hierarchial labeling is defined the same as hierarchial, except the component nameplate shall contain the most familiar complete noun.name (function description).
Modified and hierarchial labeling may be applied to dissimiliar groups on the same panel, but one or the other must be applied to all components within a group where applicable.
S L1~.~~A~DM I rico,;BC7 Arra In~/Mn Plan-I iz/zz/gs-v'-~fermi~r-Cr/rOr78 VG V/~A'r FY7c eJ C~-2>MDA F P c-~E,-WM~~AM d (i (z)mz',~~wi=w 4 8)7 i i~~J WMO-Zll, ZZ./, 2 3lr a Z4/~~0~Z'=-/a MHV-zoo, z.zo,~'o Q Z4~2~/7 7~<Mill/-Zl0, Z.ZOq ZBQ.Sz4O-m'me-zest, zz.i, z.sl.z~/
~C)~I=i-G i~MW i z'~J gi v)~m..=/.=&Me'=~/~
/p~.W>/M'A3/1 q'I P
~p~s~,~i~~f'o 0+@<r gut'~!o.i7@<>, Can=-ra/Q>:
-.-Ir..4-y~riv wsf f5 h'V-CC.v'-16 ca~~ALT Y~P~@Nil 38 H V-CLV-38*'+rorv7 gks~n 8 EAou&R~~~/g/p~/A~/l ccl 69w~v'-mY-z.A R.4A;H V-cJ Il-zDZ.~ev-a v-~z R m;ev-<<5-z.~+ev'~~-zE+-4~a esca'+&-a8&+o+re~n~p Nn b bi&Z.7cpn/rom Nn
~~P
~~P 0..c3&I/3, 5~J/0
-KPLOK hjRV-/DZ (/r B~-/rc/Dm~dcA
&~o~:::~/~.:--rip+(zr)-
'~g.-C:c s-.=UM~z a': ';-~d u~a-.0/='l~~.c C)vh JH l~l~~=~I=.=.=:c-.=-.v OVm/ZWH~~~~c
.~<iA:-:+J 4)g".iy~%M Acne N.o~-c.~~--~-~.~C'.-~"~-..c~.-wz.~
I'.C~~/Z.C3'M.-.XMg~~g C~~Ao'7 Q-GC Q GvC/PZ~.~S M~.~<a'zcz>-.C+~W~.a M n~c o-gpizc-<4=-.=.=.=~c.aA d~-~~~<~.
'l l j~...r,~~.~~~-~/~Zr~,~7-=--".=,~y".=---,-~~.=XV Pzz i~cS'G~--~Q)~.,cJ~~p.'WL-X;1'4 f
~.~>~~>>~&<<)s~w~+<<+>~r C+~~~N~Mvom/<3)~r~~~~~+-Qp f gp.Bh~k r'zg~~RS/7/CY)Qg~+CPS~70-NOR'vf OP Oq I"p 0~~~ov~HQZ-4~1-+8'~~~nW/o~Acrvo-eox~iv'a Wwz.-z-Dr 189'~u~o~~w~z-~~4~P~'~~g, Paz=az=zest zz au~n~~~-+>Z-<Z W~c5l&~(0
Pro osed RHR&SPY Panels Modification P (1)Move Foxboro stations RS-16&17 for IRV-310&320 from SPY to RHR Panel.MOVE MZ-ia-El6 on aWDZ.W~l.(2)Move the containment relief controls for VCR-I.07&207 from bottom of SPY panel up to area vacated by RS-16&17.(3)Move IMO-330&331 down to where VCR-107&207 presently located.(4)Move HV-CPR-1(SPY-21, containment pressure relief system fan)up to present location of IM0-331.(5)Interchange vertical indicators 1F1-200, 1P1-210, PPP-301&302, 1F1-331, 1Pl-200&220 on panel SPY.This gives more logical left to right order and eliminates mirror image.(6)Interchange vertical indicators 1Fl-310&311 and 1PA-320 and NPS-121, move 1PA-320 to above 1F1-320 on panel RHR.This eliminates mirror image and improves relative locations of flow and pressure indicators.
7,: lf-,.u.m~~5.+</-,.'L'g)Mays jRV-ZG Slm'(on Prem RITZ+o BA P~rr.l g presM gQV-/7G S/cn'r~lo&mn, move QgV-/70 c)Q$4g/7<7<A c?Q'f-/lz<gz Z/IZ)Gwf7GA+0'Af+RFS/dkh (8-s)
0 LaaaaFr58 o gggg'ggF+gg 5%5155SQS~NMSNSSS~E~\~I~E g-'y~'I 0~EE I~R~0 8~E 0 Q4a I~I~E 0 4~r'Er 0 o+Qgg~y y~~f~~)LL 0 i1~k~r~E 0 0~~E'I~~r P~r~E i~~~~f~r A~r~E]pe E~~i1~g Er rr~E Er~.'
I~~~~~l I e IS'O:L'0 Z Q z: oLti~0 jO Also Avdlyble Os Apertare CarR
~~~~~~
y~j;a I~lEKEHI~~a I 85N 5 8 Immi Nil m~%~I r..'gt" I)INES kllRSl tllMI Rl5%%RQRNS~5%55 8!1NSR RES I 1\l I~RS 0~L e'i 0~g g~(ee:I tl~b;v'.!C Ic L=:".C'.0~~I~>I~~IHm: gg:~Nm'j~%K 3~,~aa~:;Re,.Nk r
~~~
~~
~~~~0~<<I=:=.8~.~.-4=., f
~~=4-~J~-05r)M ddPI 19Z-cd Ck'-dd 2S-gg IN-a 18 ON-I lQ OEZ~ZEI-cf19 IGI-d19 OB-c%08-1 f8 E?ZW5 IZE-ddN (RZdctI ZZI-cn8 IZl-dig OZI-Ilg OPZ-I93 SZ-kB It I-2tPV Ig Z-DA Og-Z3 O'Z-IcLI KZ-Ia l zdvdS I IB->n I IQ'-M l CEZ-333 1 K-fcLf 1 (ZZ-18 f KZ-fd3 i IZI-338 t{Zl-3N i IZZ-&)CXZ-2 OZZ-IcS f tO H b.b H H b.b.m-0 0 0 Ogg'u<0 0&~co~O~~~~V b eJNnk M~~V Q~b.D Qo I po I 0 I Np g)0&rO 0 0.g~P~)~ga I o(~i!i a s SNy ta VIZ I IZQdPI Oft'-eel Zll-dM III-dgf I OII-ding l OII-I"OIZ-3D i 01Z-fcLI I IV H 4.b.~Bi/i!I gipii oO j)~.~k~N g OJ)9[i]0 to 7 Rhy Ageable On~Ayertare.
Car" g 70/0 7dggggg;O I (A Ul O O
~~~
0 5/Verb.'rzrin N 7o~=Brnwn A"=Green 8 i=R'ecr'Gl.77 S77m~~GAMP~SEISMIC.QUAL.NOT REQ'D NOT E.Q.BUT SHOULO BE
/HARK NO, NAME Llpprvded Labe&DRV;.,5ljl".(;
COPEN~<:-"~
-(00:7.-80 DRV.-.3;l',.2';OP.EN'.~
ci%%l','le W 6+i~New DRV.-:5 I:.I.-'LOSE" 0 Abye 57'¹r OPE VALVE,S~REF, OWG.F ULL 5I2 E MwQ0Ac~~wimr LA~mls EXAM p~E AEPSC-MED-I C C SECTION BAiLEY Nh~vAL Sveiog OIR.KCÃAa>OH PLANT b.c..C.oo+oc.kOa, 5Y: EylREY.
M4RK NO.NAME A,V TO HAND: CLOSE--'='OO/80 HANo I r A OPEX VALVE RE WG.A/ewe'i~HAVD(Aors SWA77Onl~e~i<a~x~~~~~AEPSC-WED-I 4 C SECTION QAlLC Y H/A STRATI 00 REVERSE K(TION PLANT D.C.coom-oc.boa BY': E'Kc REY.
fvf ARK NQ u~rm69 Lcydel FOXBORO I~FORINT IWC io0-'OSE Ma~uAL:-'OPEN'Vew Aider NAME F LLS t REF.OWG.PAN=t I i K%Nvi&'BE.R, NANO/Au~s7e7 lM L aamziNe wXA~w<M AEPSC-MED-I 4 C SECTION PLANT DC.C<OK Oc,RDP FOXBORO H/A, 8'f: Eel OATF STew>OX D>RSCZ P C~IOV OIG REY.SHEET I
STATUS LITE,&MONITOR LITE NAME&NUMBER FILE NAME TEMP: ANNNAME1X4.75 FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0.040" FORMAT DATE: 6-23-86 PLATE SIZE: 1" X 1 3/4" CHAR HT.=0.25" OTHER INFO: ADD 6 SPACES BETWEEN 2 GROUPS OF CHARACTERS ON BOTTOM LINE USE: CONTROL SWITCH NAMEPLATE-Bl-i'm5 FILE NAME TEMP~3LINEC/SPLATE t FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0.040" FORMAT DATE: 6-24-86 PLATE SIZE: 1 1/4" X 3i'HARACTER HT.: 1/4ss OTHER INFO.:
S USE: SYSTEM/SUBSYSTEM LABEL t FILE NAME TEMP: 3/8CHAR.1&5/16HI 2 LINES OF TEXT JOBSAVE7 FILE NAME PERM: j CUTTER: 0.060 t f FORHAT DATE: OTHER INFO'LATE SIZE: 1 5/16 HI CHARACTER HT: 3/8 6-15-86 VARIABLE LENGTH LABEL.LABEL LENGTH DEPENDENT ON TEXT LENGTH.~~UEE: WESCHLER INDICATOR AEP&WESTINGHOUSE MARK NUMBER 2-LINE LABEL I FILE NAME TEMP: 3/4X11/2LINES2B&S 1 FILE HAHE PERH:!CUTTER: 0.030"&0.020" I FORMAT DATE: 5-29-86 PLATE SIZE: 3/4 X 1 1/2" CHAR.HEIGHT: 3/16&1/8" OTHER INFO: DUAL SPINDLE SETUP I 0
FEBRUARY 6, 1986 CONTROL ROOM LABEL SPECIFICATIONS
--NUREG 0700 LABEL LETTERlNG S,dA GUlDELINE d.dA2 STYLE Recommended character styles are shown in Exhibits 6.5-1 and 65-2.a.CHARACTER SELECTION (1)Labels should be prepared in capital letters.(2)The design of letters and numerals should be simple and without flourishes or serifs.b.CHARACTER WIDTH (1)Letter width-to-height ratio should be between 1:1 and 3:5.(2)Numeral width-to+eight ratio should be 3:5 except for the numeral"4" which should be one stroke width wider and the numeral"1" which should be one stroke in width.c.STROKE WlDTH-Stroke width-tocharacter height ratio should be between 1:6 and 1:8.d.SPACING (1)The minimum space between characters should be one stroke width.(2)The minimum space between words should be one character width.(3)The minimum space between lines should be one-half of the character height.COMPLlANCE CHECKLlST k/A Y<<No STYLE: UNIVERSE 55 ACTUAL: 3.03:5 WIDTH AVG.1l.7mm HEIGHT AVG 19.3mm N/A ACTUAL I:7 VARIES WIDELY WITH X EACH CHARACTER COMB INAT ION WILL BE NO PROBLEM WITH SPACING N/A FILE NAME: "PZRPNL" CONTROL ROON PANEL LABEL~EIEUESTED ACTUAL SIGN HEIGHT/WIDTH 2 5/8" X 7 3/4" 2 5/8" X 7 3/4" CHARACTER HEIGHT 3/4" 3/4" USE: WESCHLER INDICATOR MARK NUMBER 1-LINE LABEL LE NAME TEMP: STANDARD 3/4X1 1/2 SIGN FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0.030 FORMAT DATE: 5-29-86 OTHER INFO: PLATE SIZE: 3/4 X 1 1/2" CHAR.HEIGHT: 3/16"'"y~.~'~~y~~
,.qii~~jjpigp,'Qigygy@j@ggyqg~~~~mr~gg~ly~~ktdA88&eKg<<~e~~f&8gjgtdM&8P~~QP&g USE: HAND/AUTO STATION MARK NUMBER LE NAME TEMP: 1/2X2-9 1-LINE LABEL FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0.040" RMAT DATE: 5-29-86 PLATE SIZE: 1/2 X 2" CHAR~HEIGHT: 0.25 OTHER INFO:
~a~~~.W t~4 t~~~.~~V t\~t et<<h~a~~V htt~~~tt A~\~'t~t<<t h~~~V At Arts 1\th VO htttVaththhV RV~St~VV~~O 1 AVE I EVli tVthhh LAMLN/8 SAMPL ES~O t USE: GE-AB-40 ELECTRICAL METER LABEL FILE NAME TEMP: GEAB40METER FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0.040" FORMAT OATE: 8-12-86 OTHER INFO: AT IIIE:~i*" CIIAIAC ER ET:~I'SE: PANEL SECTION IDENTIFIER FILE NAME TEMP: PANELI.D.FILE NAME PERM: 4 CHARACTERS ONLY JOBSAVE7 I TTER:, I ATE ETRE:~I ARAC ER T:~FORMAT OATE: 8-27-86 OTHER INFO: WE SCORE
LABEL, IN&SAMPLES~~~)USE: TEST TELEPHONE CIRCUIT IDENTIFIER FILE NAME TEMP: TESTTELCKT FILE NAME PERM: JOBSAVE7 CUTTER: 0.120&0.030 FORMAT DATE: 8-22-86 PLATE SIZE: 1 7/32 X 3" CHARACTER HT: 3/4&3/16 OTHER INFO;OK TO USE 1 1/4 X 3 STOCK.DUAL SPINDLE ENGRAVING/~M)USE: CONTROL SWITCH NAMEPLATE-2 LINES FILE NAME TEMP: 2LINEC/SPLATE FILE NAME PERM: CUTTER: 0 040" FORMAT DATE: 6-25-86 OTHER INFO: PLATE SIZE: 1 1/4" X 3" CHARACTER HT: 1/4" COOK DCRDR-PSR PHOTOGRAPH DESCRIPTION Photo 1: Critical equipment tape-red demarcation line, around Reactor Breaker control switch and indicating lamps.2)t Engraved white lamp cap between red and green lamps above Reactor Breaker control switch.3)Safety Train Tape-horizontal green tape labeled Train A below Reactor Breaker control switch.4)Recorder nameplate at.top of recorder and immediately below safety train tape.5)Foxboro Station labels-left side of picture, same elevation as Reactor Breaker control switch.6)Yellow labels are information labels, yellow represents important or cautionary message.Photo 2: Panel boundary line-wide vertical olive green line on right side of picture.2)System demarcation line-medium width vertical and horizontal olive green line on left side of picture.3)Subsystem demarcation line-narrow width vertical olive green line at right center of picture.4)5)Panel Label at top of picture.Status and Monitor Lights nameplates at top left of picture.6)Hierarchial labels on the three sets of vertical indicators and two ammeters.Photo 3: Electrical mimic lines-black horizontal and vertical lines running, between control switches and labels with voltage level designators.
Photo 4: 1)RG 1.97 Stickers-Post Accident Monitoring Instrumentation identifiers are the beige color stickers immediately adjacent to red and green indicating lamps.2)Component nameplates immediately above contxol switches.
Photo 5: Bailey Station labels-red and green stickers at sides of indicating scale.2)Valve Mark No.Labels-at bottom of Bailey station and between red and green lamps above station.Photo 6: View showing the Steam Generator/Aux Feedpumps panel at the center, with a part of the Delta Temp/Unit/Steam Dump panel on the left and the Main Feedpumps panel on the right.This overall view shows the hierarchial labeling and demarcation scheme, and the dark green border portion of the carpet at the bottom.REX3(pd)
APPENDIX K The attached personnel resumes are for AEP personnel shown on the DCRDR Program Organization Structure, Figure 1-5, page.1-12, Volume 1, that were not included in the original program plan.
c I~h pe William E.Arnold, Jr.Senior En ineer Instrumentation
&Control Section Fifteen years experience in instrumentation, control and protective systems, activities in fossil fuel power generation, and five years of management activity relating to the same industry.EDUCATION:
B.S.Electrical Engineering, West Virginia Institute of Technology, 1967.EXPERIENCE:
1984 to present American Electric Power Service Cor oration Senior Engineer, Instrumentation and Control Section-Basic responsibility is to provide support for the Cook Nuclear Plant Units 1&2 upgrades.Project items that make up this support are as follows: Responsible for fifteen small RFC's, performed 1984 FSAR Update for Section, prepared 1985 Budget forecast for Section, provided the I&C support for Unit 2 Cycle 6 fuel analysis, working on and directing the work of others on a multitude of problems relating to Human Engineering Deficiencies which will be solved by the DCRDR project.1980 to 1984 Kentuck Power Com an Plant Outage Coordinator in the Maintenance Department.
In this capacity, I worked with the Maintenance Superintendent, Production Superintendent, and Canton Engineering Group in planning scheduled outages.During the outages, I coordinated the plant work force, contract labor, and other outside services.In between scheduled outages, I prepared the Five-Year Plan, coordinated and developed sections of the budget and assisted in outage report writing.I developed a very comprehensive Outage , Preventative Maintenance Program for both units.1977 to 1980 Performance Supervising Engineer-In this capacity, I supervised the Instrument Maintenance Supervisors and eleven technicians.
Helped Instrument Maintenance Supervisors plan outage work and special help on electrical problems.Also, responsible for special project installation jobs and made design changes in process control systems.1972 to 1977 Performance Engineer Senior-Performed the function of Instrument Maintenance Supervisor.
Issued the work orders on a day-to-day basis to eight technicians and worked with the department head in planning emergency and scheduled outage work.
~~~4'I r,,~~I~0 1967 to 1972 Performance Engineer-Worked in the New York office in The Electrical Engineering Division checking out the electrical prints for Big Sandy Plant-Unit 2, (Temporary Assignment).
~After prints were completed, I returned to Big Sandy Plant and worked with check-out crews on the instrumentation and controls for the Unit.Expertise developed in the following areas: Control S stems: 250V-D.C.Control Systems-Centralized Batteries Motor Control Centers Valve Control Centers (Motor Operated)600 Volt Breaker Control 4160 Volt Breaker Control Turbine Controls (Electro Hydraulic Control)A.C.Control Systems Control S stem Indicators: (Recorders and Panel Mounted Indicators)
L&N, Bristol, Bailey, Hagan, Foxboro, Westinghouse, General Electric, etc.WEA2-R I'
WILLIAM R.MORAN PAGE 3 OF 3 UNV SI YOF OR 1971-1973 Graduate Student, Teaching Assistant Tutored undergraduates in thermodynamics and heat transfer.k Instructed experimental engineering lab for senior year mechanical engineers.
~EDUCA 0 NOTRE DAME UNIVERSITY NOTRE DAME UNIVERSITY BSME, 1971 MSME, 1974 Thesis: Natural Convection Mass Transfer Adjacent to Vertical and Downward Facing Inclined Surfaces.Courses at the RPI Graduate Center, Hartford, CT PUBLICATIONS 1."Natural Convection Adjacent to Horizontal Surface of Various Platforms", W.R.Moran and J.R.Lloyd, ASME Journal of Heat Transfer, November 1984 2."Natural Convection Mass Transfer Adjacent to Vertical and Downward Facing Inclined Surfaces", W.R.Moran and J.R.Lloyd, ASME Journal of Heat Transfer, August 1985 MEMBERSHIP Professional Engineer (CT)Tau Beta Pi" (Honorary Fraternity)
Pi Tau Sigma (Honorary Fraternity) 4 l (g I g A'l~~y f~<gQ~g.a~a~e I'4 E l I J~5I',
WILLIAM R.MORAN PAGE 2 OF 3 c el E e mal Desi ssGou 1975-1982 Provided transient and'teady state thermal analyses of reactor internal components required for design and safety analyses.-Assessed and developed reactor core thermal performance limits.Included three dimensional fluid analysis combined with single and boiling heat transfer analyses to support the reload analysis for nuclear power plants.Predicted primary system flow rate for nuclear reactors including combining system pressure losses with the pump performance to calculate expected flow rate and assessed the uncertainties associated with flow prediction using statistical analysis.Provided thermal'hydraulic analysis for a proposal to DOE for the development of a dry storage cask for nuclear fuel.Duties included material selection and natural circulation combined with radiation, convection, and conduction heat transfer analyses.Prepared and presented a series of formal thermal hydraulic lectures to the operations and engineering staffs at six nuclear power stations.PRATT&WHITNEY AIRCRAFT 1973-1975 J n ineer Power Plant S stems Grou Provided thermal analyses for rotating and static components in industrial and aircraft gas turbines.Involved use of compressible flow and convection heat transfer analyses.
i I s,t, If F Pi.it i 1 I WILLIAM R.MORAN 898 Clover Drive Worthington, Ohio 43085 WORK XPERIENC AMERICAN ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE CORPORATION En nee uclear 0 erat o s Divisio 1986-Present Primary responsibility is interfacing with AEPSC Engineering, Design, Construction, and the D.C, Nuclear Plant on outage and long-range planning activities for both capitalized and'expensed modifications and additions.
Current responsibilities include developing master service contracts, participating in human factors reviews, assisting with the development of a,long-range planning program, and supporting the implementation of Requests For Change (RFCs).COMBUSTION ENGINEERING, INC.P o ect Mana er Nuclear Services De artment 1975-1986 1985-1986 Developed business and managed work effort in the southeastern United States necessary to assure customer satisfaction.
Identified available market and marketing strategies to penetrate the Westinghouse, Babcock and Wilcox, and General Electric Nuclear markets, placed C-E on approved.bidders lists, prepared and priced proposals, managed financial and commercial aspects of contract, and reviewed final invoicing.
Consultant 0 eratin Reactor Su ort Grou 1982-1985 As assistant Project Manager, provided general support of the initial St.Lucie Unit No.1 Core Support Barrel (CSB)recovery program and assisted with the management of the entire program.(A$40+million program'asting approximately 1 1/2 years.)Coordinated formation of joint task force team between the Florida Power and Light Company and Combustion Engineering.
Task force was formed to study, understand, and to reduce or eliminate the deterioration of steam generator tubes.Coordinated efforts among the engineering, chemistry, and inspection groups of both companies.
Assisted Florida Operating Reactor Project Office in the development and execution of a wide range of engineering solutions to operating, engineering, and licensing issues.Worked with Utility and C-E engineering groups to define potential solutions, formalize a proposal, and manage the commercial aspects of the task.Assisted Project Management groups with the development and marketing of their particular project lines.Involved working with C-E engineering groups, outside vendors, and the utility.
I='P=~I\I l~(g).i a l.<<, I p 4 g~,~II ll'I James A.Schlunt Electr ical En ineer in Electr ical Generation Eight years of experience in engineerng electrical systems for electr ical generation facilities (both coal fueled and nuclear fueled plants).One year experience in electrical substation engirieering activities.
EDUCATION:
'SEE, UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI, 1977 EXPERIENCE:
American Electric Power Service Cor oration 1982 to Present 1983 to Present System Engineer in Electrical Generation as part of the engineering support for Indiana 5 Michigan Electric Company's D.C.Cook Nuclear Plant.Responsibilities include engineering of changes to electrical and electrical control systems, responding to IE and NRC Notices, and assisting Plant Operations.
Engineering change responsibilities include the following.
Analysis and scoping of change, circuit design, specifying equipment and purchase of equipment.
Coordinating project work between own section personnel, other AEPSC departments, and Plant Construction.
Response to IE and NRC Notices responsibilities include the following.
Scoping of response, involving other sections if necessary, performing necessary research and/or analysis, and preparation of the response.Assisting Plant Operations responsibilities include the following.
Supporting plant personnel in the event of an emergency, answering question from plant concerning electrical systems, performing reviews of plant procedures, performing reviews of Plant Problem Reports, providing input for Plant Problem Report evaluations, and otherwise providing support to plant personnel.
I'4 r*'4~, C J, a t I 1982 to 198$Electrical Engineering in Electrical Station Projects Section.Work involved engineering of electrical substations.
Responsibilities included development of substation one-line and location plan, specification of all substation equipment, working closely with substation design group in development of substation design, and'oordinating engineering for substation protection and metering.Also developed detail cost estimate for substation.
Work included assisting Regional Planning on system design changes.1977 to 1982 Indiana 5 Michi an Electric Com an Tanners Creek Generatin Plant Subsidiary of AEP)Performance Engineer in Performance Department.
Responsibilities included the following.
Making minor design modifications to plant controls and instrumentation, including numerous control panel changes, evaluating condition of plant controls and instrumentation systems and maintenance of control and instrumentation systems.Performed and evaluated tests on plant's major equipment to determine efficiency and proper working order.Supervised instrument mechanics during unit startups and in suppor t of instr ument for eman.Pr ovided coordination for projects originating from AEPSC offices with plant per sonnel.CO-OP EXPERIENCE:
Cincinnati Gas and Electric Com an Co-0 Throu h Universit of Cincinnati Work varied from hands on experience as a helper in plant maintenance department at Beckjord Generating Station to assisting in engineering activities concerning construction of Miami Fort Generating Station Unit's t7 and 8.Also did layout work for substation protection and layout work for residential distribution.
PROFESSIONAL AFFILIATION Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
'
APPENDIX J DONALD C.COOK NUCLEAR PLANT UNITS I AND 2 CONTROL ROOM IMPROVEMENTS PHOTOS, SAMPLES, DRAHI NGS
CcM le%-Correl~Aaron'kalari'i5'~mjrlei STCA91 OJCIICRACOII3 ghana;9CCDFJJII93
~JJ RR Co(C 5.Ct a I gR Q Br.a g$%'SCw+a"N.(X)8 8 G3 8 8')0'92~211" I CH EG.O.0 CDCI CXK 0 0 lW--: 992-ttI'FFZ.231 EKI CK3~0 0'5-'K FFX 241 A+3 ,O.'0', 131'R'.17i MRC 110 ffC;tIO i'll.9 I IO'PR'-18<,IiIRC 120 fee;tt0 CII'.9"'ItO IMR I3'IAOC 130 g FC'230;DI.9"130;ma.aa 2 wCC~I40 f 9C'240 Q.F140i JAo tOI 312 DRV'311 A@I I 9JAo.tot Ijl DR 322 ORY 3tl l'lC$i 3'32 DRY 331 Ii J3 gom0 H4[j~]0 V 342 DRY 341 IJ'10 MR V.213 e~9 RV if+I/2a)'225 f IIV 230 MRV 233 elise~FREYA MR%240 243'x',P.-.W~[/e e i('0 44, e o M SGZZ38 e~i~[gzi~p 8 cole e e a.5"e eI.gf, tV~~3, q%HO~.o.I 7 eve c etio etle hPPQ7~AISEECP[$eIDe PI2K240 STEAM GENERATORS 4 AUX FEED PUMPS.("S 6").PAHEL SEAM g BEND LINK 1@DRUM'0 kfOOI~ICATIOh/
6"86 Z~a s&~n in color howe novi.i~jwiul n~ai~sc~~cl)Ac7~~~~+~mMr flcGrkcp)
Cmc LX'A~XR-&rrs1+~~ion Plan EJ1amPM Rf54ENL'&T REHASH 0 s, IL ,r If,~hler'+IT+3II~l i'3$Tg I I@I IR 0 Ol A I R O nJ 4, Il 0 4, MR;15 I ITR'3RI I';I I', I I I I I I'I e e e 1~IO IRV 311 K ee~I~Rt ee ee i~J~OO[g,~e 0 l&~i 0 igSg24 EKE 1 TEST Sw 4)~RESOUAL HEAf REMOVAL RWCI.SEAM~g MNI3 um Idioms Mwn color/n~~i~/wIllrnmveJ mam en<rce~M er rnMiPinn son
TllRGIIIT:
ILUTE'ILIA@I 5PX<00 5PX II LPX 3 a.PX-S LPX l XLT ITTB 6RG 3 Lr V1B 5.LT<<V,l B GAG I~LT LV.lB spx-zoo cpx-io2.LPX 2 C Lr V,1B SRC 9 LT VJB SRC IO LT LV,1B SRG TLT V1B ORG g LT IV1B SC'Q eo'~~~S~~s~i IOI U'OI U~IO'OPI Pl li S 6 ysoAs Q G S-l-Ilj IIIj lllj aMII>>S G S~L~L~w&~RV2 2 V 0 6~'I 02~I WRvSR B 8 S 6 0~i 6 0~~2il v llv2 si use uai 5G tt D E AH 6 0 IO 6 8 SC 6 6 LIVV2ia~GG l~>'-a WC@Vi'kV44>6 8 Q~66 QOGOG c8 Q S SC~5 TSP.43 wgw975 wRV 97O IO t'4 I3 9)>'V-lavl A!S PC6 lal IOI IO'0 GQ~G w~Rv AS sV AVE 9 I ills'-IIj V*CII}~v>f5%~V emxe eu~'e~e emne emge camo 603X!0 6~8 QGKQS&~O~8 EGBle a a DMO OSLO SKQS~~8 eGiBQ 02XLo ezze ewe SKIES 6~8 Q~8&GZQ 8 Q KGB 8 SE9ls Scabs 6~S eaZZS&CBEES Gams 0>>TURBINE PANEL (T)uwIT l PANO.SEAM UNE~'I 18 5G t3 SC C 6 SG'8 g R ssR SVI V VH I%"t~I 4-..~I I I~5 0 5Rv IIII G 0~wV IO 0 Q 0 sav-lO 5Rv ll AJB8 5LIO QQ@8 Q~QS Q~le MPR ZXO MPX'253 MR-'R5 GRv SRv'4dl I/~~<D 6 0'GAMP WOO 5PR-3OI SPR 303 i TllR 29<<~OS G~S l%NE1.~ABEL UNE:IMS Skvvn in color V GI POCeN~/~pi/
poe~v~!m~j+j~gg~~
'70/opggg p-DQ L 1 l r fl~~~0)0 UNDERSIZED DOCUMENl 8 K4,~~t~oo o goal~oo 4 gem@Q g)~~I C~H<<awe 0 0 UNDERSIZED DOCUMENTS"e i 00~~',a[iÃA gg egg--QQ QQ,QQ QQ-ii,5 gl Q I,~0[j O.g I'l l"I L';: 5,Q,Y-0-x z llfliLfi grani'j iE7iiJ Mw~'Q A I a I'g@8 Ll h)i grok e
UNDERSIZED DOCUMENYS